diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2010-06-18 23:21:28 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2010-06-18 23:21:28 +0000 |
| commit | 0dfdf5c49b160d464b74a9cae8882ea81cc47878 (patch) | |
| tree | bdf5cdba055386a23c7c34606b0ac3cde619f5de /Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex | |
| parent | 9af4aa84209bad3ca4dab9a48aa1922d2f748de2 (diff) | |
new latex package jmlr 1.06 (18jun10)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@19046 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex')
32 files changed, 8302 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9a42b677437 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/CHANGES @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ +v1.06: + + jmlr.cls + + * Added tablecaptiontop and tablecaptionbottom class options + +v1.05: + + jmlrbook.cls + + * Added \productioneditors + +v1.04: + + * Added Perl script makejmlrbook + + jmlrbook.cls + + * Added patch to fix references in print mode + + * Added code to work with makejmlrbook + + jmlr.cls + + * Added code to work with makejmlrbook + +v1.03: + jmlrbook.cls + + * Added patch to combnat + + jmlr.cls + + * Added \editors, \editorname and \editorsname + +v1.02: + jmlrbook.cls: + + * Added \issue + + jmlr.cls + + * Added \jmlrissue + +v1.01 : + + jmlrbook.cls: + + * added \importpaper + + * added \titlebody, \SetTitleElement and \IfTitleElement to + make it easier to customise the front page of the book. + + jmlr.cls: + + * fixed the last page anchor. + +v1.0 : Initial release diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..805c257c5b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/INSTALL @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +INSTALLATION + +If you have downloaded the jmlr bundle using the TeX Directory +Structure (TDS), that is you have downloaded the archive +jmlr.tds.zip containing doc, tex and source directories, you need to +follow the "Installing from TDS" instructions below. + +If you have downloaded the following files: + +jmlr.dtx +jmlr.ins + +You need to follow the "Installing from DTX and INS" instructions +below. + +For further information on installing LaTeX packages see: + +http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=installthings + +INSTALLING FROM TDS +=================== + +Files in tex and doc directories should go in the corresponding +TEXMF directories (for example, /usr/share/texmf-local/ or +C:\localtexmf\). + +*Remember to refresh TeX's database* + +Example (on UNIX like systems): + +unzip jmlr.tds.zip -d ~/texmf/ +texhash ~/texmf/ + +Move the makejmlrbook Perl script from scripts/jmlr/ to somewhere +on your path. If you are using Windows, you will also need to +move makejmlrbook.bat to the same location. + +INSTALLING FROM DTX AND INS +=========================== + +Run LaTeX on jmlr.ins to generate jmlr.cls and jmlrbook.cls: + +latex jmlr.ins + +To create the documentation (jmlr.pdf): + +pdflatex jmlr.dtx +makeindex -s gind.ist jmlr.idx +makeindex -s gglo.ist -o jmlr.gls jmlr.glo +pdflatex jmlr.dtx +pdflatex jmlr.dtx + +If TEXMF denotes the base directory of your local TeX installation (e.g. +/usr/share/texmf-local/ or C:\localtexmf\) then create the following +directories (if they don't already exist): + +TEXMF/doc/latex/jmlr +TEXMF/tex/latex/jmlr + +Move the documentation to TEXMF/doc/latex/jmlr/ + +Move jmlr.cls and jmlrbook.cls to TEXMF/tex/latex/jmlr/ + +*Remember to refresh TeX's database* + +Move the makejmlrbook Perl script to somewhere on your path. If +you are using Windows, you will also need to move makejmlrbook.bat +to the same location. + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2dce9e7f235 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/README @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +LaTeX Class : jmlr bundle v1.06 + +Last Modified : 2010-06-17 + +Author : Nicola L. C. Talbot + +This bundle provides: + + * jmlr class + * jmlrbook class + * makejmlrbook Perl script + +The jmlr class is a LaTeX2e class for articles for the Journal of +Machine Learning Research (JMLR) or for the JMLR Workshop and +Conference Proceedings (JMLR W&CP). It is designed as a replacement +for both jmlr2e.sty and jmlrwcp2e.sty. + +The jmlrbook class is a LaTeX2e class that can be used to combine +articles written using the jmlr class into a book. The jmlrbook +class uses the combine class and the hyperref package to produce +either a colour hyperlinked book for on-line viewing or a greyscale +nonhyperlinked book for printing. + +The makejmlrbook Perl script can be used to create the hyperlinked and +nonhyperlinked PDFs of a document using the jmlrbook class. It can also +create a set of HTML files that list the included papers with links +to their abstracts and the individual articles as PDFs. + +INSTALLATION + +See INSTALL file for installation instructions. + +REQUIREMENTS + +jmlr class requirements: + + KOMA-Script + xcolor + amsmath + amssymb + natbib + graphicx + url + algorithm2e + +jmlrbook class requirements: + + jmlr + combine + hyperref + xkeyval + combnat + setspace + +makejmlrbook Perl script requirements: + + Perl + TeX4ht + +LICENCE + +This material is subject to the LaTeX Project Public License. +See http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/help/Catalogue/licenses.lppl.html +for the details of that license. + +Author's home page: http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/ + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..31e5052a65e --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.html @@ -0,0 +1,4505 @@ +<a + id="top"></a><?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso-8859-1" ?> +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<!--http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd--> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" +> +<head><title>LaTeX2εClasses for the Journal of Machine Learning Research</title> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=iso-8859-1" /> +<meta name="generator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.cse.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/)" /> +<meta name="originator" content="TeX4ht (http://www.cse.ohio-state.edu/~gurari/TeX4ht/)" /> +<!-- xhtml,fn-in,css-in --> +<meta name="src" content="jmlr-manual.tex" /> +<meta name="date" content="2010-06-17 20:52:00" /> + +<style type="text/css"> +<!-- + +/* start css.sty */ +.cmmi-10{font-style: italic;} +.ecrm-1728{font-size:170%;} +.cmmi-12x-x-144{font-size:172%;font-style: italic;} +.ecrm-1200{font-size:120%;} +.cmsy-8{font-size:80%;} +.ectt-1200{font-size:120%; font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1200{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-1000{ font-family: monospace;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-1000{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecrm-0900{font-size:90%;} +.ecrm-0800{font-size:80%;} +.ecss-0800{font-size:80%; font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecss-0800{ font-family: sans-serif;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecbx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ecsx-1000{ font-weight: bold;} +.ectt-0900{font-size:90%; font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0900{ font-family: monospace;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-1000{ font-style: italic;} +.ectt-0800{font-size:80%; font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ectt-0800{ font-family: monospace;} +.ecti-0800{font-size:80%; font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecti-0800{ font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +.ecbi-1000{ font-weight: bold; font-style: italic;} +p.noindent { text-indent: 0em } +td p.noindent { text-indent: 0em; margin-top:0em; } +p.nopar { text-indent: 0em; } +p.indent{ text-indent: 1.5em } +@media print {div.crosslinks {visibility:hidden;}} +a img { border-top: 0; border-left: 0; border-right: 0; } +center { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; } +td center { margin-top:0em; margin-bottom:0em; } +.Canvas { position:relative; } +img.math{vertical-align:middle;} +li p.indent { text-indent: 0em } +li p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; } +li p:last-child, li div:last-child { margin-bottom:0.5em; } +li p~ul:last-child, li p~ol:last-child{ margin-bottom:0.5em; } +.enumerate1 {list-style-type:decimal;} +.enumerate2 {list-style-type:lower-alpha;} +.enumerate3 {list-style-type:lower-roman;} +.enumerate4 {list-style-type:upper-alpha;} +div.newtheorem { margin-bottom: 2em; margin-top: 2em;} +.obeylines-h,.obeylines-v {white-space: nowrap; } +div.obeylines-v p { margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; } +.overline{ text-decoration:overline; } +.overline img{ border-top: 1px solid black; } +td.displaylines {text-align:center; white-space:nowrap;} +.centerline {text-align:center;} +.rightline {text-align:right;} +div.verbatim {font-family: monospace; white-space: nowrap; text-align:left; clear:both; } +.fbox {padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } +div.fbox {display:table} +div.center div.fbox {text-align:center; clear:both; padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } +div.minipage{width:100%;} +div.center, div.center div.center {text-align: center; margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em;} +div.center div {text-align: left;} +div.flushright, div.flushright div.flushright {text-align: right;} +div.flushright div {text-align: left;} +div.flushleft {text-align: left;} +.underline{ text-decoration:underline; } +.underline img{ border-bottom: 1px solid black; margin-bottom:1pt; } +.framebox-c, .framebox-l, .framebox-r { padding-left:3.0pt; padding-right:3.0pt; text-indent:0pt; border:solid black 0.4pt; } +.framebox-c {text-align:center;} +.framebox-l {text-align:left;} +.framebox-r {text-align:right;} +span.thank-mark{ vertical-align: super } +span.footnote-mark sup.textsuperscript, span.footnote-mark a sup.textsuperscript{ font-size:80%; } +div.footnotes{border-top:solid 1px black; border-bottom:solid 1px black; padding-bottom:1ex; padding-top:0.5ex; margin-right:15%; margin-top:2ex; font-style:italic; font-size:85%;} +div.footnotes p{margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; text-indent:0;} +div.tabular, div.center div.tabular {text-align: center; margin-top:0.5em; margin-bottom:0.5em; } +table.tabular td p{margin-top:0em;} +table.tabular {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} +td p:first-child{ margin-top:0em; } +td p:last-child{ margin-bottom:0em; } +div.td00{ margin-left:0pt; margin-right:0pt; } +div.td01{ margin-left:0pt; margin-right:5pt; } +div.td10{ margin-left:5pt; margin-right:0pt; } +div.td11{ margin-left:5pt; margin-right:5pt; } +table[rules] {border-left:solid black 0.4pt; border-right:solid black 0.4pt; } +td.td00{ padding-left:0pt; padding-right:0pt; } +td.td01{ padding-left:0pt; padding-right:5pt; } +td.td10{ padding-left:5pt; padding-right:0pt; } +td.td11{ padding-left:5pt; padding-right:5pt; } +table[rules] {border-left:solid black 0.4pt; border-right:solid black 0.4pt; } +.hline hr, .cline hr{ height : 1px; margin:0px; } +.tabbing-right {text-align:right;} +span.TEX {letter-spacing: -0.125em; } +span.TEX span.E{ position:relative;top:0.5ex;left:-0.0417em;} +a span.TEX span.E {text-decoration: none; } +span.LATEX span.A{ position:relative; top:-0.5ex; left:-0.4em; font-size:85%;} +span.LATEX span.TEX{ position:relative; left: -0.4em; } +div.float, div.figure {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} +div.float img {text-align:center;} +div.figure img {text-align:center;} +.marginpar {width:20%; float:right; text-align:left; margin-left:auto; margin-top:0.5em; font-size:85%; text-decoration:underline;} +.marginpar p{margin-top:0.4em; margin-bottom:0.4em;} +table.equation {width:100%;} +.equation td{text-align:center; } +td.equation { margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; } +td.equation-label { width:5%; text-align:center; } +td.eqnarray4 { width:5%; white-space: normal; } +td.eqnarray2 { width:5%; } +table.eqnarray-star, table.eqnarray {width:100%;} +div.eqnarray{text-align:center;} +div.array {text-align:center;} +div.pmatrix {text-align:center;} +table.pmatrix {width:100%;} +span.pmatrix img{vertical-align:middle;} +div.pmatrix {text-align:center;} +table.pmatrix {width:100%;} +span.bar-css {text-decoration:overline;} +img.cdots{vertical-align:middle;} +.partToc a, .partToc, .likepartToc a, .likepartToc {line-height: 200%; font-weight:bold; font-size:110%;} +.index-item, .index-subitem, .index-subsubitem {display:block} +div.caption {text-indent:-2em; margin-left:3em; margin-right:1em; text-align:left;} +div.caption span.id{font-weight: bold; white-space: nowrap; } +h1.partHead{text-align: center} +p.bibitem { text-indent: -2em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom:0.6em; } +p.bibitem-p { text-indent: 0em; margin-left: 2em; margin-top:0.6em; margin-bottom:0.6em; } +.paragraphHead, .likeparagraphHead { margin-top:2em; font-weight: bold;} +.subparagraphHead, .likesubparagraphHead { font-weight: bold;} +.quote {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; margin-right:1em; text-align:justify;} +.verse{white-space:nowrap; margin-left:2em} +div.maketitle {text-align:center;} +h2.titleHead{text-align:center;} +div.maketitle{ margin-bottom: 2em; } +div.author, div.date {text-align:center;} +div.thanks{text-align:left; margin-left:10%; font-size:85%; font-style:italic; } +.quotation {margin-bottom:0.25em; margin-top:0.25em; margin-left:1em; } +.abstract p {margin-left:5%; margin-right:5%;} +div.abstract {width:100%;} +table.multicols { width:100%; margin-left:1em; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; } +.equation td{text-align:center; } +.equation-star td{text-align:center; } +table.equation-star { width:100%; } +table.equation { width:100%; } +table.align, table.alignat, table.xalignat, table.xxalignat, table.flalign {width:100%; margin-left:5%; white-space: nowrap;} +table.align-star, table.alignat-star, table.xalignat-star, table.flalign-star {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; white-space: nowrap;} +td.align-label { width:5%; text-align:center; } +td.align-odd { text-align:right; padding-right:0.3em;} +td.align-even { text-align:left; padding-right:0.6em;} +table.multline, table.multline-star {width:100%;} +td.gather {text-align:center; } +table.gather {width:100%;} +div.gather-star {text-align:center;} +div.important { background-color:red; } +/* end css.sty */ + + +--> +</style> +</head><body +> + <div class="maketitle"> + + + + + + + +<h2 class="titleHead"><span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2ε Classes for the Journal of Machine +Learning Research</h2> + <div class="author" ><span +class="ecrm-1200">Nicola L. C. Talbot</span> +<br /><a +href="http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1200">http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/</span></a></div><br /> +<div class="date" ><span +class="ecrm-1200">2010-06-17 (version 1.06)</span></div> + </div> + <h3 class="likesectionHead"><a + id="x1-1000"></a>Contents</h3> + <div class="tableofcontents"> + <span class="sectionToc" >1 <a +href="#x1-20001" id="QQ2-1-2">Introduction</a></span> +<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >2 <a +href="#x1-30002" id="QQ2-1-3">Required Packages</a></span> +<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >3 <a +href="#x1-40003" id="QQ2-1-4">Guidelines for Article Authors</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.1 <a +href="#x1-50003.1" id="QQ2-1-5">Title Information</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.2 <a +href="#x1-60003.2" id="QQ2-1-6">Font Changing Commands</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.3 <a +href="#x1-70003.3" id="QQ2-1-7">Structure</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.4 <a +href="#x1-80003.4" id="QQ2-1-8">Citations and Bibliography</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.5 <a +href="#x1-90003.5" id="QQ2-1-9">Figures and Tables</a></span> +<br />   <span class="subsubsectionToc" >3.5.1 <a +href="#x1-100003.5.1" id="QQ2-1-10">Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.6 <a +href="#x1-110003.6" id="QQ2-1-11">Algorithms</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.7 <a +href="#x1-120003.7" id="QQ2-1-12">Description Lists</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.8 <a +href="#x1-130003.8" id="QQ2-1-13">Theorems, Lemmas etc</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.9 <a +href="#x1-140003.9" id="QQ2-1-14">Cross-Referencing</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.10 <a +href="#x1-150003.10" id="QQ2-1-15">Mathematics</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.11 <a +href="#x1-160003.11" id="QQ2-1-17">Color vs Grayscale</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >3.12 <a +href="#x1-170003.12" id="QQ2-1-18">Where To Go For Help</a></span> +<br /> <span class="sectionToc" >4 <a +href="#x1-180004" id="QQ2-1-19">Guidelines for Production Editors</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.1 <a +href="#x1-190004.1" id="QQ2-1-20"><span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>Class Options</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.2 <a +href="#x1-200004.2" id="QQ2-1-21">The Preamble</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.3 <a +href="#x1-210004.3" id="QQ2-1-22">Main Book Commands</a></span> +<br />   <span class="subsubsectionToc" >4.3.1 <a +href="#x1-220004.3.1" id="QQ2-1-23">Cross-Referencing</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.4 <a +href="#x1-230004.4" id="QQ2-1-24">Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page</a></span> +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.5 <a +href="#x1-240004.5" id="QQ2-1-25">Potential Pitfalls</a></span> + + + +<br />  <span class="subsectionToc" >4.6 <a +href="#x1-250004.6" id="QQ2-1-26">Creating the Book Using <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span></a></span> +<br /> <span class="sectionToc" ><a +href="#Q1-1-27">Index</a></span> + </div> +<!--l. 30--><p class="noindent" > +</p> + <h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">1 </span> <a + id="x1-20001"></a>Introduction</h3> +<!--l. 32--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class is for articles that need to be formatted according to the Journal of +Machine Learning Research style. This class is based on the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a + id="dx1-2001"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a + id="dx1-2002"></a> +packages but has been adapted to enable it to work better with the <span +class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a + id="dx1-2003"></a> class to +collate the articles into a book. <a +href="#x1-40003">§3 </a><a +href="#x1-40003">Guidelines for Article Authors<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:jmlr --></a> describes how to use +the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. +</p><!--l. 39--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class is for combining JMLR articles into a book. This class uses +<span +class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a + id="dx1-2004"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-2005"></a>, which are troublesome enough on their own but together are +quite fragile. The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class redefines some internals to get <span +class="ecss-1000">combine </span>and <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span> +to work together but some packages (e.g. <span +class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a + id="dx1-2006"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">pdfpages</span><a + id="dx1-2007"></a>) are likely to +mess everything up and cause errors. This is why the guidelines to authors are +fairly stringent and why <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>will give an error message if certain packages are +loaded.<span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn1x0" id="fn1x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">1</sup></a></span><a + id="x1-2008f1"></a> +The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class works best with PDF<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> so authors should ensure that their +articles can compile with PDF<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. <a +href="#x1-180004">§4 </a><a +href="#x1-180004">Guidelines for Production Editors<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:jmlrbook --></a> describes +how to use the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class. +</p><!--l. 56--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-2015"></a> Perl script can be used to make a book that uses the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span> +class. In addition to creating the print and online versions of the book, it will +compile the individual articles, running Bib<span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> where necessary, and create a +set of HTML files containing a list of all the articles imported into the book +along with links to the abstracts and PDFs of the individual articles. <a +href="#x1-250004.6">§4.6 +</a><a +href="#x1-250004.6">Creating the Book Using <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><!--tex4ht:ref: sec:makejmlrbook --></a> describes how to use the <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-2016"></a> +application. +</p><!--l. 65--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 65--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">2 </span> <a + id="x1-30002"></a>Required Packages</h3> +<!--l. 67--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class is based on the <span +class="ecss-1000">scrartcl</span><a + id="dx1-3001"></a> class and loads the following packages: +<span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a + id="dx1-3002"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">amssymb</span><a + id="dx1-3003"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a + id="dx1-3004"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">url</span><a + id="dx1-3005"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">graphicx</span><a + id="dx1-3006"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-3007"></a>. Note that unlike the +<span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a + id="dx1-3008"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a + id="dx1-3009"></a> packages, this class file does not load the obsolete <span +class="ecss-1000">epsfig</span><a + id="dx1-3010"></a> +package. +</p><!--l. 73--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class additionally loads the <span +class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a + id="dx1-3011"></a> class and the following packages: +<span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-3012"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">xkeyval</span><a + id="dx1-3013"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">combnat</span><a + id="dx1-3014"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">setspace</span><a + id="dx1-3015"></a>. +</p><!--l. 77--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-3016"></a> script requires Perl, <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> and <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span>4ht. + + + +</p><!--l. 79--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 79--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3 </span> <a + id="x1-40003"></a>Guidelines for Article Authors</h3> +<!--l. 82--><p class="noindent" >Article authors should use the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. This class comes with example files +<span +class="ectt-1000">jmlr-sample.tex </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrwcp-sample.tex</span>, which can be used as templates. +</p><!--l. 86--><p class="indent" > The following class options are available: + </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">nowcp</span><a + id="dx1-4001"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">The article is for the Journal of Machine Learning Research (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">wcp</span><a + id="dx1-4002"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">The article is for JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">color</span><a + id="dx1-4003"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Color version (see <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">gray</span><a + id="dx1-4004"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Grayscale version (see <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptiontop</span><a + id="dx1-4005"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">in a <span +class="ecss-1000">table</span><a + id="dx1-4006"></a><a + id="dx1-4007"></a> environment, <span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a + id="dx1-4008"></a> puts the caption at the top. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span><a + id="dx1-4009"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">in a <span +class="ecss-1000">table</span><a + id="dx1-4010"></a><a + id="dx1-4011"></a> environment, <span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a + id="dx1-4012"></a> puts the caption at the + bottom.</dd></dl> +<!--l. 103--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 103--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.1 </span> <a + id="x1-50003.1"></a>Title Information</h4> +<!--l. 105--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class uses different syntax from <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a + id="dx1-5001"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a + id="dx1-5002"></a> to specify the title +information. In particular, it doesn’t define <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrheading </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">\ShortHeading</span>. Instead, +the following commands should be used: +</p><!--l. 110--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrvolume</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrvolume{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">number</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 112--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the volume number. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-1"> +\jmlrvolume{2} +</div> +<!--l. 116--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 118--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlryear</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlryear{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">year</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 120--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the year. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-2"> +\jmlryear{2010} +</div> +<!--l. 124--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 126--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrsubmitted</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrsubmitted{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">date</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 128--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the submission date. +</p><!--l. 131--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrpublished</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5006"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrpublished{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">date</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 133--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the publication date. +</p><!--l. 136--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrworkshop</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5007"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrworkshop{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 138--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the workshop title (for use with the <span +class="ecss-1000">wcp</span><a + id="dx1-5008"></a> class option). +</p><!--l. 142--><p class="indent" > The title information is specified using the commands described below. These +commands should typically go in the preamble. As with most class files, The title itself +is produced using +</p><!--l. 145--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\maketitle</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5009"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 147--><p class="noindent" > +This command should go after <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{document}</span></span></span>. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-3"> +\begin{document} + <br />\maketitle +</div> +<!--l. 152--><p class="nopar" > Before <span +class="ectt-1000">\maketitle</span>, you must specify the title information using the following +commands: +</p><!--l. 156--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\title</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5010"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\title[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 158--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the article’s title. A short title for the page header can be supplied via the +optional argument <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. +</p><!--l. 162--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\editor</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5011"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\editor{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 164--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the editor’s name. If there is more than one editor, use: +</p><!--l. 167--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\editors</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\editors{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">names</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 169--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 171--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\author</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5013"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\author{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">author specs</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 173--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the author. The specifications <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">author specs</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>are a bit different to <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e</span><a + id="dx1-5014"></a> +and <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e</span><a + id="dx1-5015"></a>. Use +</p><!--l. 176--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\Name</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5016"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\Name{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">author’s name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 178--><p class="noindent" > +to specify the author’s name. Note that if the surname contains a space it must be +grouped (enclosed in braces {}). Similarly if the initial letter of each forename is a +diacritic it must be grouped. (See below for examples.) +</p><!--l. 183--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\Email</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5017"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\Email{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">author’s email</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 185--><p class="noindent" > +This specifies the author’s email address. It should only be used within the argument to +<span +class="ectt-1000">\author</span>. +</p><!--l. 189--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\and</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5018"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\and </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 191--><p class="noindent" > +This should be used to separate two authors with the same address. +</p><!--l. 194--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\AND</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5019"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\AND </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 196--><p class="noindent" > +This should be used to separate authors with different addresses. +</p><!--l. 199--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\\</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5020"></a> <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\\</span></span></span> </div><hr> +</p><!--l. 201--><p class="noindent" > +This should be used before an author’s address or between authors with the same +address where there are more that two authors. +</p><!--l. 205--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\addr</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-5021"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\addr </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 207--><p class="noindent" > +This should be used at the start of the address. +</p><!--l. 210--><p class="indent" > + + + + </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">Example 1</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Two authors with the same address: + + + + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-4"> + \author{\Name{Jane Doe} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and +  <br />   \Name{John {Basey Fisher}} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ +  <br />   \addr Address} +</div> + <!--l. 216--><p class="nopar" > In this example, the second author has a space in his surname so the surname + needs to be grouped. + </p></dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">Example 2</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Three authors with the same address: + + + + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-5"> + \author{\Name{Fred Arnold {de la Cour}} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\ +  <br />   \Name{Jack Jones} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\ +  <br />   \Name{{\’E}louise {\’E}abhla Finchley} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\ +  <br />   \addr Address} +</div> + <!--l. 226--><p class="nopar" > In this example, the third author has an accent on her forename initials so + grouping is required. + </p></dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">Example 3</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Authors with a different address: + + + + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-6"> + \author{\Name{John Smith} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\ +  <br />  \addr Address 1 +  <br />  \AND +  <br />  \Name{May Brown} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ +  <br />  \addr Address 2 +  <br /> } +</div> + <!--l. 238--><p class="nopar" ></p></dd></dl> +<!--l. 241--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 241--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.2 </span> <a + id="x1-60003.2"></a>Font Changing Commands</h4> +<!--l. 243--><p class="noindent" >Use the <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2<span +class="cmmi-10">ε</span> font changing commands, such as <span +class="ectt-1000">\bfseries </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">\textbf{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span>, +rather than the obsolete <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>2.09 commands, such as <span +class="ectt-1000">\bf</span>. +</p><!--l. 247--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\url</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-6001"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\url{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">address</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 249--><p class="noindent" > +This will typeset <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">address</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>in a typewriter font. Special characters, such as <span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">~</span></span></span>, are +correctly displayed. Example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-7"> +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/} +</div> +<!--l. 254--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 256--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\mailto</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-6002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\mailto{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">email address</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 258--><p class="noindent" > +This will typeset the given email address in a typewriter font. Note that this is not the +same as <span +class="ectt-1000">\Email</span>, which should only be used in the argument of <span +class="ectt-1000">\author</span>. +</p><!--l. 263--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 263--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.3 </span> <a + id="x1-70003.3"></a>Structure</h4> +<!--l. 265--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">abstract</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7001"></a><a + id="dx1-7002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{abstract}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{abstract} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 269--><p class="noindent" > +The abstract text should be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">abstract </span>environment. +</p><!--l. 273--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">keywords</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7003"></a><a + id="dx1-7004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{keywords}</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">keyword list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{keywords} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 275--><p class="noindent" > +The keywords should be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">keywords </span>environment. +</p><!--l. 279--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\acks</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\acks{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 281--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the acknowledgements. +</p><!--l. 284--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\section</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7006"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\section{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 286--><p class="noindent" > +Section titles are created using <span +class="ectt-1000">\section</span>. The heading is automatically numbered and +can be cross-referenced using <span +class="ectt-1000">\label </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">\ref</span>. Unnumbered sections can be produced +using: +</p><!--l. 291--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\section*</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7007"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\section*{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 293--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 295--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsection</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 297--><p class="noindent" > +Sub-section titles are created using <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection</span>. Unnumbered sub-sections can be +produced using: +</p><!--l. 300--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsection*</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7009"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection*{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 302--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 304--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7010"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 306--><p class="noindent" > +Sub-sub-section titles are created using <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection</span>. Unnumbered sub-sub-sections +can be produced using: + + + +</p><!--l. 309--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection*</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7011"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection*{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 311--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 313--><p class="noindent" >Further sectioning levels can be obtained using <span +class="ectt-1000">\paragraph </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph</span>, but +these are unnumbered with running heads. +</p><!--l. 316--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\appendix</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-7012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 318--><p class="noindent" > +Use <span +class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span>to switch to the appendices. This changes <span +class="ectt-1000">\section </span>to produce an +appendix. Example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-8"> +\appendix + <br />\section{Proof of Theorems} +</div> +<!--l. 324--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 326--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 326--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.4 </span> <a + id="x1-80003.4"></a>Citations and Bibliography</h4> +<!--l. 328--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class automatically loads <span +class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a + id="dx1-8001"></a> and sets the bibliography style to <span +class="ectt-1000">plainnat</span>. +References should be stored in a <span +class="ectt-1000">.bib </span>file. +</p><!--l. 332--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\bibliography</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-8002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\bibliography{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">bib file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 334--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the bibliography. +</p><!--l. 337--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\citep</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-8003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\citep[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pre note</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">][</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">post note</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 339--><p class="noindent" > +Use <span +class="ectt-1000">\citep </span>for a parenthetical citation. +</p><!--l. 342--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\citet</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-8004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\citet[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">note</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 344--><p class="noindent" > +Use <span +class="ectt-1000">\citet </span>for a textual citation. +</p><!--l. 347--><p class="indent" > See the <a +href="http://ctan.org/pkg/natbib" ><span +class="ecss-1000">natbib</span><a + id="dx1-8005"></a> documentation</a> for further details. +</p><!--l. 349--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 349--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.5 </span> <a + id="x1-90003.5"></a>Figures and Tables</h4> +<!--l. 351--><p class="noindent" >Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving objects and are +supposed to float to the nearest convenient location. Please don’t force them +to go in a particular place. In general it’s best to use the <span +class="ectt-1000">htbp </span>specifier and +don’t put the float in the middle of a paragraph (that is, make sure there’s a +paragraph break above and below the float). Floats are supposed to have a +little extra space above and below them to make them stand out from the +rest of the text. This extra space is put in automatically and shouldn’t need +modifying. +</p><!--l. 361--><p class="indent" > To ensure consistency, please <span +class="ecti-1000">don’t </span>try changing the format of the caption by doing +something like: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-9"> +\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}} +</div> +<!--l. 365--><p class="nopar" > or + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-10"> +\caption{\em A Sample Caption.} +</div> +<!--l. 369--><p class="nopar" > You can, of course, change the font for individual words or phrases. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-11"> +\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.} +</div> +<!--l. 374--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 376--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides the following command for displaying the contents of a figure +or table: +</p><!--l. 378--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\floatconts</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-9001"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">caption command</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 380--><p class="noindent" > +This ensures that the caption is correctly positioned and that the contents are centered. +For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-12"> +\begin{table}[htbp] + <br />\floatconts + <br />  {tab:example}% label + <br />  {\caption{An Example Table}}% caption command + <br />  {% + <br />    \begin{tabular}{ll} + <br />    \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + <br />    Data1 & 0.123456 + <br />    \end{tabular} + <br />  } + <br />\end{table} +</div> +<!--l. 395--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 397--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class automatically loads <span +class="ecss-1000">graphicx</span><a + id="dx1-9002"></a> which defines: +</p><!--l. 399--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\includegraphics</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-9003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">options</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 401--><p class="noindent" > +where <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">options</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>is a comma-separated list of options. +</p><!--l. 404--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose you have an image called <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic.png </span>in a subdirectory called +<span +class="ectt-1000">images</span>: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-13"> +\begin{figure}[htbp] + <br />\floatconts + <br />  {fig:example}% label + <br />  {\caption{An Example Figure}}% caption command + <br />  {\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{images/mypic}} + <br />\end{figure} +</div> +<!--l. 413--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 415--><p class="indent" > Note that you shouldn’t specify the file extension when including the image. It’s +helpful if you can also provide a grayscale version of color images. This should be +labeled as the color image but with <span +class="ectt-1000">-gray </span>immediately before the extension. (The +extension need not be the same as that of the color image.) For example, if you +have an image called <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic.pdf</span>, the grayscale can be called <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.pdf</span>, +<span +class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.png </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic-gray.jpg</span>. See <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a> for further +details. +</p><!--l. 425--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\includeteximage</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-9004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">options</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 427--><p class="noindent" > +If your image file is made up of <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> code (e.g. <span +class="ecss-1000">tikz</span><a + id="dx1-9005"></a> commands) the file can be included +using <span +class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage</span>. The optional argument is a key=value comma-separated list +where the keys are a subset of those provided by <span +class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span>. The main keys +are: <span +class="ectt-1000">width</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">height</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">scale </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">angle</span>. +</p><!--l. 435--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 435--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h5 class="subsubsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.5.1 </span> <a + id="x1-100003.5.1"></a>Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables</h5> +<!--l. 437--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a + id="dx1-10001"></a> package causes a problem for <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>so the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class will give an error if it +is used. Therefore the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides its own commands for including sub-figures +and sub-tables. +</p><!--l. 442--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subfigure</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-10002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subfigure[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">][</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 444--><p class="noindent" > +This makes a sub-figure where <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>denotes the contents of the sub-figure. This +should also include the <span +class="ectt-1000">\label</span>. The first optional argument <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>indicates a caption +for the sub-figure. By default, the sub-figures are aligned at the base. This can be +changed with the second optional argument <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>, which may be one of: <span +class="ectt-1000">t </span>(top), <span +class="ectt-1000">c</span> +(centred) or <span +class="ectt-1000">b </span>(base). +</p><!--l. 453--><p class="indent" > For example, suppose there are two images files, <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic1.png </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">mypic2.png</span>, in +the subdirectory <span +class="ectt-1000">images</span>. Then they can be included as sub-figures as follows: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-14"> +\begin{figure}[htbp] + <br />\floatconts + <br />  {fig:example2}% label for whole figure + <br />  {\caption{An Example Figure.}}% caption for whole figure + <br />  {% + <br />    \subfigure{% + <br />      \label{fig:pic1}% label for this sub-figure + <br />      \includegraphics{images/mypic1} + <br />    }\qquad % space out the images a bit + <br />    \subfigure{% + <br />      \label{fig:pic2}% label for this sub-figure + <br />      \includegraphics{images/mypic2} + <br />    } + <br />  } + <br />\end{figure} +</div> +<!--l. 472--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 474--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subtable</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-10003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subtable[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">][</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 476--><p class="noindent" > +This is an analogous command for sub-tables. The default value for <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">valign</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>is +<span +class="ectt-1000">t</span>. +</p><!--l. 480--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 480--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.6 </span> <a + id="x1-110003.6"></a>Algorithms</h4> +<!--l. 482--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">algorithm</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-11001"></a><a + id="dx1-11002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{algorithm}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{algorithm} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 486--><p class="noindent" > +Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm </span>environment. +Within this environment, use <span +class="ectt-1000">\caption</span><a + id="dx1-11003"></a> to set the caption (and <span +class="ectt-1000">\label</span><a + id="dx1-11004"></a> to +cross-reference it). Within the body of the environment you can use the <span +class="ecss-1000">enumerate</span><a + id="dx1-11005"></a><a + id="dx1-11006"></a> +environment. +</p><!--l. 493--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">enumerate*</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-11007"></a><a + id="dx1-11008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{enumerate*}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\item </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">…</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{enumerate*} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 498--><p class="noindent" > +If you want to have nested <span +class="ecss-1000">enumerate</span><a + id="dx1-11009"></a><a + id="dx1-11010"></a> environments but you want to keep the same +numbering throughout the algorithm, you can use the <span +class="ecss-1000">enumerate* </span>environment, +provided by the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-15"> +\begin{enumerate*} + <br />  \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0 + <br />  \item Set $i=0$ + <br />  \begin{enumerate*} + <br />    \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices + <br />          adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$ + <br />    \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled, + <br />    \begin{enumerate*} + <br />      \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and + <br />      the length is given by the label of $t$. + <br />    \end{enumerate*} + <br />    otherwise + <br />    \begin{enumerate*} + <br />      \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate} + <br />    \end{enumerate*} + <br />  \end{enumerate*} + <br />\end{enumerate*} + <br />\end{algorithm} +</div> +<!--l. 522--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 525--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">algorithm2e</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-11011"></a><a + id="dx1-11012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{algorithm2e}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">contents</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{algorithm2e} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 529--><p class="noindent" > +Pseudo code can be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e </span>environment, provided by the +<span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-11013"></a> package, which is automatically loaded. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-16"> +\begin{algorithm2e} + <br />\caption{Computing Net Activation} + <br />\label{alg:net} + <br />\dontprintsemicolon + <br />\linesnumbered + <br />\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$} + <br />\KwOut{$y$, the net activation} + <br />$y\leftarrow 0$\; + <br />\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{ + <br />  $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\; + <br />} + <br />\end{algorithm2e} +</div> +<!--l. 546--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 548--><p class="indent" > See the <a +href="http://ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e" ><span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-11014"></a> documentation</a> for more details. +</p><!--l. 550--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 550--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.7 </span> <a + id="x1-120003.7"></a>Description Lists</h4> +<!--l. 552--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">altdescription</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-12001"></a><a + id="dx1-12002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{altdescription}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">widest label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\item[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">] </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">item text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{altdescription} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 556--><p class="noindent" > +In addition to the standard <span +class="ecss-1000">description</span><a + id="dx1-12003"></a><a + id="dx1-12004"></a> environment, the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class also provides the +<span +class="ecss-1000">altdescription </span>environment. This has an argument that should be the widest label used +in the list. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-17"> +\begin{altdescription}{differentiate} + <br />\item[add] A method that adds two variables. + <br />\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. + <br />\end{altdescription} +</div> +<!--l. 566--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 568--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 568--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.8 </span> <a + id="x1-130003.8"></a>Theorems, Lemmas etc</h4> +<!--l. 570--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides the following theorem-like environments: <span +class="ecss-1000">theorem</span><a + id="dx1-13001"></a><a + id="dx1-13002"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">example</span><a + id="dx1-13003"></a><a + id="dx1-13004"></a>, +<span +class="ecss-1000">lemma</span><a + id="dx1-13005"></a><a + id="dx1-13006"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">proposition</span><a + id="dx1-13007"></a><a + id="dx1-13008"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">remark</span><a + id="dx1-13009"></a><a + id="dx1-13010"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">corollary</span><a + id="dx1-13011"></a><a + id="dx1-13012"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">definition</span><a + id="dx1-13013"></a><a + id="dx1-13014"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">conjecture</span><a + id="dx1-13015"></a><a + id="dx1-13016"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">axiom</span><a + id="dx1-13017"></a><a + id="dx1-13018"></a>. Within the body +of those environments, you can use the <span +class="ecss-1000">proof</span><a + id="dx1-13019"></a><a + id="dx1-13020"></a> environment to display the proof if need +be. The theorem-like environments all take an optional argument, which gives the +environment a title. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-18"> +\begin{theorem}[An Example Theorem] + <br />\label{thm:example} + <br />This is the theorem. + <br />\begin{proof} + <br />This is the proof. + <br />\end{proof} + <br />\end{theorem} +</div> +<!--l. 586--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 588--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 588--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.9 </span> <a + id="x1-140003.9"></a>Cross-Referencing</h4> +<!--l. 591--><p class="noindent" >Always use <span +class="ectt-1000">\label</span><a + id="dx1-14001"></a> when cross-referencing, rather than writing the number explicitly. +The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class provides some convenience commands to assist referencing. +These commands, described below, can all take a comma-separated list of +labels. +</p><!--l. 596--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\sectionref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\sectionref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 598--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a section or sections. For example, if you defined a section as +follows: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-19"> +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} +</div> +<!--l. 603--><p class="nopar" > you can refer to it as follows: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-20"> +The results are detailed in \sectionref{sec:results}. +</div> +<!--l. 607--><p class="nopar" > This command may also be used for sub-sections and sub-sub-sections. +</p><!--l. 610--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\appendixref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\appendixref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 612--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to an appendix or multiple appendices. +</p><!--l. 615--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\equationref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\equationref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 617--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to an equation or multiple equations. +</p><!--l. 620--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\tableref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\tableref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 622--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a table or multiple tables. This can also be used for sub-tables where +the main table number is also required. +</p><!--l. 626--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subtabref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14006"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subtabref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 628--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to sub-tables without the main table number, e.g. (<span +class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or (<span +class="ecti-1000">b</span>). +</p><!--l. 632--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\figureref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14007"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\figureref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 634--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a figure or multiple figures. This can also be used for sub-figures where +the main figure number is also required, e.g. 2(<span +class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or 4(<span +class="ecti-1000">b</span>). +</p><!--l. 639--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subfigref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subfigref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 641--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to sub-figures without the main figure number, e.g. (<span +class="ecti-1000">a</span>) or (<span +class="ecti-1000">b</span>). +</p><!--l. 645--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\algorithmref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14009"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\algorithmref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 647--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to an algorithm or multiple algorithms. +</p><!--l. 650--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\theoremref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14010"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\theoremref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 652--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a theorem or multiple theorems. +</p><!--l. 655--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\lemmaref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14011"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\lemmaref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 657--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a lemma or multiple lemmas. +</p><!--l. 660--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\remarkref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\remarkref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 662--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a remark or multiple remarks. +</p><!--l. 665--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\corollaryref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14013"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\corollaryref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 667--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a corollary or multiple corollaries. +</p><!--l. 670--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\definitionref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14014"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\definitionref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 672--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a definition or multiple definitions. + + + +</p><!--l. 675--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\conjectureref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14015"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\conjectureref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 677--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to a conjecture or multiple conjectures. +</p><!--l. 680--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\axiomref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14016"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\axiomref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 682--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to an axiom or multiple axioms. +</p><!--l. 685--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\exampleref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-14017"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\exampleref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 687--><p class="noindent" > +Used to refer to an example or multiple examples. +</p><!--l. 690--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 690--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.10 </span> <a + id="x1-150003.10"></a>Mathematics</h4> +<!--l. 692--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class loads the <span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a + id="dx1-15001"></a> package so you can use any of the commands and +environments defined in that package. A brief summary of some of the more common +commands and environments is provided here. See the <a +href="http://ctan.org/pkg/amsmath" ><span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a + id="dx1-15002"></a> documentation</a> for +further details. +</p><!--l. 697--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\set</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-15003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\set{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 699--><p class="noindent" > +In addition to the commands provided by <span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a + id="dx1-15004"></a>, the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class also provides the +<span +class="ectt-1000">\set </span>command which can be used to typeset a set. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-21"> +The universal set is denoted $\set{U}$ +</div> +<!--l. 705--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 707--><p class="indent" > Unnumbered single-line equations should be displayed using <span +class="ectt-1000">\[ </span>and <span +class="ectt-1000">\]</span>. For +example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-22"> +\[E = m c^2\] +</div> +<!--l. 711--><p class="nopar" > Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">equation</span><a + id="dx1-15005"></a><a + id="dx1-15006"></a> environment. +For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-23"> +\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule} + <br />\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1 + <br />\end{equation} +</div> +<!--l. 718--><p class="nopar" > Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">align</span><a + id="dx1-15007"></a><a + id="dx1-15008"></a> environment. For +example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-24"> +\begin{align} + <br />f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\ + <br />f’(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df} + <br />\end{align} +</div> +<!--l. 726--><p class="nopar" > Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">align*</span><a + id="dx1-15009"></a><a + id="dx1-15010"></a> environment. +For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-25"> +\begin{align*} + <br />f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\ + <br />&= x^2 - 1 + <br />\end{align*} +</div> +<!--l. 734--><p class="nopar" > If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the <span +class="ecss-1000">align</span><a + id="dx1-15011"></a><a + id="dx1-15012"></a> environment and +suppress unwanted line numbers with <span +class="ectt-1000">\nonumber</span>. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-26"> +\begin{align} + <br />y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\ + <br />&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y} + <br />\end{align} +</div> +<!--l. 743--><p class="nopar" > An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be displayed using the <span +class="ecss-1000">split</span><a + id="dx1-15013"></a><a + id="dx1-15014"></a> +environment. +</p><!--l. 747--><p class="indent" > Text can be embedded in an equation using <span +class="ectt-1000">\text</span><a + id="dx1-15015"></a><span +class="ectt-1000">{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span>or you can use +<span +class="ectt-1000">\intertext</span><a + id="dx1-15016"></a><span +class="ectt-1000">{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">text</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span>to interupt a multi-line environment such as <span +class="ecss-1000">align</span><a + id="dx1-15017"></a><a + id="dx1-15018"></a>. +</p><!--l. 751--><p class="indent" > Predefined operator names are listed in <a +href="#x1-150241">table 1</a>. For additional operators, either +use +</p><!--l. 753--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\operatorname</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-15019"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\operatorname{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 755--><p class="noindent" > +for example + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-27"> +If $X$ and $Y$ are independent, + <br />$\operatorname{var}(X+Y) = + <br />\operatorname{var}(X) + \operatorname{var}(Y)$ +</div> +<!--l. 761--><p class="nopar" > or declare it with +</p><!--l. 763--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\DeclareMathOperator</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-15020"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">command</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span> +</div><hr> +</p><!--l. 765--><p class="noindent" > +for example + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-28"> +\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var} +</div> +<!--l. 769--><p class="nopar" > and then use this new command: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-29"> +If $X$ and $Y$ are independent, + <br />$\var(X+Y) = \var(X)+\var(Y)$ +</div> +<!--l. 774--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 776--><p class="indent" > If you want limits that go above and below the operator (like <span +class="ectt-1000">\sum</span><a + id="dx1-15021"></a>) use the starred +versions (<span +class="ectt-1000">\operatorname*</span><a + id="dx1-15022"></a> or <span +class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator*</span><a + id="dx1-15023"></a>). +</p> + <div class="table"> + + + +<!--l. 780--><p class="indent" > <a + id="x1-150241"></a></p><hr class="float" /><div class="float" +> + + + + <div class="caption" +><span class="id">Table 1: </span><span +class="content">Predefined Operator Names (taken from <span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath</span><a + id="dx1-15025"></a> documentation)</span></div><!--tex4ht:label?: x1-150241 --> +<div class="tabular"> <table id="TBL-2" class="tabular" +cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" +><colgroup id="TBL-2-1g"><col +id="TBL-2-1" /><col +id="TBL-2-2" /><col +id="TBL-2-3" /><col +id="TBL-2-4" /><col +id="TBL-2-5" /><col +id="TBL-2-6" /><col +id="TBL-2-7" /><col +id="TBL-2-8" /></colgroup><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-1-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-1" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\arccos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">arccos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\deg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">deg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\lg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">lg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-1-7" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\projlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-1-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">proj</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span +class="cmr-10">lim</span></td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-2-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\arcsin</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">arcsin</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\det</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">det</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\lim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">lim</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-2-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\sec</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-2-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">sec</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-3-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\arctan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">arctan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\dim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">dim</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-5" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\liminf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">lim</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span +class="cmr-10">inf</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-3-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\sin</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-3-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">sin</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-4-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\arg</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">arg</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\exp</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">exp</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-5" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\limsup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">lim</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span +class="cmr-10">sup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-4-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\sinh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-4-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">sinh</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-5-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\cos</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">cos</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\gcd</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">gcd</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\ln</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">ln</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-5-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\sup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-5-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">sup</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-6-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\cosh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">cosh</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\hom</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">hom</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\log</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">log</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-6-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\tan</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-6-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">tan</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-7-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\cot</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">cot</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\inf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">inf</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\max</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">max</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-7-7" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\tanh</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-7-8" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">tanh</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-8-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\coth</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">coth</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-3" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\injlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">inj</span><span style="margin-left:0.3em" class="thinspace"></span><span +class="cmr-10">lim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-8-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\min</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-8-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">min</span> </td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-2-9-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\csc</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-2" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">csc</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\ker</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-4" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">ker</span> </td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-2-9-5" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\Pr</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-2-9-6" +class="td11"><span +class="cmr-10">Pr</span> </td></tr></table></div> +<div class="tabular"> <table id="TBL-3" class="tabular" +cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" +><colgroup id="TBL-3-1g"><col +id="TBL-3-1" /><col +id="TBL-3-2" /><col +id="TBL-3-3" /><col +id="TBL-3-4" /></colgroup><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-3-1-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-1-1" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\varlimsup</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-1-2" +class="td11"><img +src="jmlr-manual0x.png" alt="--- +lim" class="mathpalette" /></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-1-3" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\varinjlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-1-4" +class="td11"><img +src="jmlr-manual1x.png" alt="li-→m" class="mathpalette" /></td> +</tr><tr + style="vertical-align:baseline;" id="TBL-3-2-"><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-2-1" +class="td11"> <span +class="ectt-1000">\varliminf</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-2-2" +class="td11"><img +src="jmlr-manual2x.png" alt="lim-" class="mathpalette" /></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:right;" id="TBL-3-2-3" +class="td11"><span +class="ectt-1000">\varprojlim</span></td><td style="white-space:nowrap; text-align:left;" id="TBL-3-2-4" +class="td11"><img +src="jmlr-manual3x.png" alt="lim +←-" class="mathpalette" /></td> +</tr></table></div> + + + + </div><hr class="endfloat" /> + </div> +<!--l. 806--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.11 </span> <a + id="x1-160003.11"></a>Color vs Grayscale</h4> +<!--l. 809--><p class="noindent" >It’s helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their articles in the event that the +article is to be incorporated into a black and white printed book. With external PDF, +PNG or JPG graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the file. For +example, if the file is called <span +class="ectt-1000">myimage.png</span>, then the gray version should be +<span +class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.png </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.pdf </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">myimage-gray.jpg</span>. You don’t need to +modify your code. The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class checks for the existence of the grayscale version if it is +print mode (provided you have used <span +class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span><a + id="dx1-16001"></a> and haven’t specified the file +extension). +</p><!--l. 821--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\ifprint</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-16002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\ifprint{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 823--><p class="noindent" > +You can use <span +class="ectt-1000">\ifprint </span>to determine which mode you are in. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-30"> +in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the + <br />\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} + <br />ellipse represents an input and the + <br />\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse + <br />represents an output. +</div> +<!--l. 832--><p class="nopar" > Another example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-31"> +{\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!} +</div> +<!--l. 836--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 838--><p class="indent" > You can use the class option <span +class="ecss-1000">gray</span><a + id="dx1-16003"></a> to see how the document will appear in gray scale +mode. +</p><!--l. 841--><p class="indent" > The <span +class="ecss-1000">xcolor</span><a + id="dx1-16004"></a> class is loaded with the <span +class="ecss-1000">x11names </span>option, so you can use any of the x11 +predefined colors (listed in the <a +href="http://ctan.org/pkg/xcolor" ><span +class="ecss-1000">xcolor</span><a + id="dx1-16005"></a> documentation</a>). +</p><!--l. 845--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 845--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">3.12 </span> <a + id="x1-170003.12"></a>Where To Go For Help</h4> +<!--l. 847--><p class="noindent" >If you have a <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> query, the first place to go to is the <a +href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq" >UK TUG FAQ</a>. +</p><!--l. 850--><p class="indent" > If you are unfamiliar or just getting started with <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>, there’s a list of on-line introductions +to <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> at: <a +href="http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1000">http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex</span></a> +</p><!--l. 854--><p class="indent" > There are also forums, mailing lists and newsgroups. For example, the +<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> Community (<a +href="http://www.latex-community.org/" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1000">http://www.latex-community.org/</span></a>), the <span +class="ectt-1000">texhax </span>mailing list +(<a +href="http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1000">http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax</span></a>) and <span +class="ectt-1000">comp.text.tex </span>(archives available +at <a +href="http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1000">http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/</span></a>). +</p><!--l. 861--><p class="indent" > Documentation for packages or classes can be found using the <span +class="ectt-1000">texdoc </span>application. +For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-32"> +texdoc natbib +</div> +<!--l. 865--><p class="nopar" > Alternatively, you can go to <span +class="ectt-1000">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>where <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>is the +name of the package. For example: <a +href="http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib" class="url" ><span +class="ectt-1000">http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib</span></a> +</p><!--l. 871--><p class="indent" > For a general guide to preparing papers (regardless of whether you are using +<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> or a word processor), see Kate L. Turabian, “A manual for writers +of term papers, theses, and dissertations”, The University of Chicago Press, +1996. +</p><!--l. 876--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 876--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="sectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4 </span> <a + id="x1-180004"></a>Guidelines for Production Editors</h3> +<!--l. 879--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class can be used to combine articles that use the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>document class +into a book. The following sample files are provided: <span +class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span>, +<span +class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">paper3/paper3.tex</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">jmlr-sample.tex</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrwcp-sample.tex</span> +and <span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrbook-sample.tex</span>. All but the last named one are articles using the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class. +The last one (<span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrbook-sample.tex</span>) uses the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class file to combine the articles +into a book. Note that no modifications are needed to the files using the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class when +they are imported into the book. They can either be compiled as stand-alone articles or +with the entire book. +</p><!--l. 892--><p class="indent" > Before you compile the book, make sure that all the articles compile as stand-alone +documents (and run Bib<span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> where necessary). You can use the <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-18001"></a> Perl +script to compile the book and create associated HTML files. See <a +href="#x1-250004.6">§4.6 </a><a +href="#x1-250004.6">Creating the +Book Using <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><!--tex4ht:ref: sec:makejmlrbook --></a> for details. +</p><!--l. 898--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 898--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.1 </span> <a + id="x1-190004.1"></a><span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>Class Options</h4> +<!--l. 899--><p class="noindent" > + </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">nowcp</span><a + id="dx1-19001"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">The imported pre-published articles were published in the Journal of + Machine Learning Research (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">wcp</span><a + id="dx1-19002"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">The imported pre-published articles were published in the JMLR Workshop + and Conference Proceedings. + <!--l. 905--><p class="noindent" >If the book has a mixture of JMLR and JMLR WCP articles, you can switch + between them using + + + + </p><!--l. 907--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrwcp</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-19003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrwcp </span></div><hr> + </p><!--l. 909--><p class="noindent" > + and + </p><!--l. 911--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrnowcp</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-19004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrnowcp </span></div><hr> + </p><!--l. 913--><p class="noindent" > + Alternatively, you can set the name of the journal or conference proceedings + using: + </p><!--l. 916--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\jmlrproceedings</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-19005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrproceedings{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">long title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> + </p><!--l. 918--><p class="noindent" > + </p></dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">color</span><a + id="dx1-19006"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Color version (see <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). Use this option for the on-line + version with hyperlinks enabled (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">gray</span><a + id="dx1-19007"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Grayscale version (see <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a>). Use this option for the print + version without hyperlinks. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptiontop</span><a + id="dx1-19008"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">in a <span +class="ecss-1000">table</span><a + id="dx1-19009"></a><a + id="dx1-19010"></a> environment, <span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a + id="dx1-19011"></a> puts the caption at the + top. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span><a + id="dx1-19012"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">in a <span +class="ecss-1000">table</span><a + id="dx1-19013"></a><a + id="dx1-19014"></a> environment, <span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span><a + id="dx1-19015"></a> puts the caption at the + bottom. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">letterpaper</span><a + id="dx1-19016"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Set the paper size to letter (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">7x10</span><a + id="dx1-19017"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Set the paper size to <span +class="cmr-10">7 </span><span +class="cmsy-10">× </span><span +class="cmr-10">10 </span>inches. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">prehyperref</span><a + id="dx1-19018"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>automatically loads the <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-19019"></a> package, but some packages + need to be loaded before <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-19020"></a>. This information can be specified using the + <span +class="ecss-1000">prehyperref</span><a + id="dx1-19021"></a> option. This is a key=value option. For example, to load the packages + <span +class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and <span +class="ecss-1000">bar </span>before <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-19022"></a>, you can do: + + + + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-33"> + \documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}]{jmlrbook} +</div> + <!--l. 945--><p class="nopar" > or: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-34"> + \documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}]{jmlrbook} +</div> + <!--l. 949--><p class="nopar" > + </p></dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">10pt</span><a + id="dx1-19023"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Use 10pt as the normal text size. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">11pt</span><a + id="dx1-19024"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Use 11pt as the normal text size (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecsx-1000">12pt</span><a + id="dx1-19025"></a> </dt><dd +class="description">Use 12pt as the normal text size. + </dd></dl> +<!--l. 957--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 957--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.2 </span> <a + id="x1-200004.2"></a>The Preamble</h4> +<!--l. 959--><p class="noindent" >Any packages that the imported articles load (which aren’t automatically loaded by +<span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr</span>) must be loaded in the book’s preamble. For example, if one or more +of the articles load the <span +class="ecss-1000">siunitx</span><a + id="dx1-20001"></a> package, this package must be loaded in the +book. +</p><!--l. 964--><p class="indent" > Commands that are defined in the imported articles will be local to that article +unless they have been globally defined using <span +class="ectt-1000">\gdef</span><a + id="dx1-20002"></a> or <span +class="ectt-1000">\global</span><a + id="dx1-20003"></a>. Since most authors use +<span +class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span><a + id="dx1-20004"></a> and <span +class="ectt-1000">\newenvironment</span><a + id="dx1-20005"></a> (or <span +class="ectt-1000">\renewcommand</span><a + id="dx1-20006"></a> and <span +class="ectt-1000">\renewenvironment</span><a + id="dx1-20007"></a>) this +shouldn’t cause a conflict if more that one article has defined the same command or +environment. For example, in the sample files supplied, both <span +class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span> +and <span +class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex </span>have defined the command <span +class="ectt-1000">\samplecommand </span>using +<span +class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span>. As long as this command isn’t also defined in the book, there won’t be a +conflict. +</p><!--l. 976--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\title</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\title[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">PDF title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">book title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 978--><p class="noindent" > +In the book preamble, <span +class="ectt-1000">\title </span>sets the book title and the optional argument is used for +the PDF title, which will be displayed when the reader views the PDF file’s properties +in their PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, <span +class="ectt-1000">\title </span>sets the article’s title +and the optional argument sets the short title for the page header and table of +contents.) +</p><!--l. 986--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\author</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20009"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\author[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">PDF author(s)</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">book author(s)</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> + + + +</p><!--l. 988--><p class="noindent" > +In the book preamble, <span +class="ectt-1000">\author </span>sets the book’s author (or editor) and the optional +argument is used for the PDF author, which will be displayed when the reader views +the PDF file’s properties in their PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, +<span +class="ectt-1000">\author </span>sets the article’s author and the optional argument sets the short author list +for the page header.) +</p><!--l. 996--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\volume</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20010"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\volume{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">number</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 998--><p class="noindent" > +This command sets the book’s volume number. Omit if the book has no volume +number. +</p><!--l. 1002--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subtitle</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20011"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subtitle{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">sub-title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1004--><p class="noindent" > +This command sets the book’s subtitle. Omit if the book has no sub-title. +</p><!--l. 1008--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\logo</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\logo{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">image command</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1010--><p class="noindent" > +This sets the book’s title image. Use <span +class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span><a + id="dx1-20013"></a> and omit the file extension. If +you provide a grayscale version as well as a color version, the grayscale version will be +used for the print version of the book. (See <a +href="#x1-160003.11">§3.11 </a><a +href="#x1-160003.11">Color vs Grayscale<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:color --></a> for further +details.) +</p><!--l. 1017--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\team</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20014"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\team{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">team title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1019--><p class="noindent" > +This can be used to set the name of the editorial team. This command may be omitted +if not required. +</p><!--l. 1023--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\productioneditor</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-20015"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\productioneditor{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1025--><p class="noindent" > +This command may be used to name the production editor. The command may be +omitted if not required. +</p><!--l. 1029--><p class="indent" > See <a +href="#x1-230004.4">§4.4 </a><a +href="#x1-230004.4">Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:modifytitle --></a> for details on how to modify the +layout of the title page. +</p><!--l. 1032--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 1032--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.3 </span> <a + id="x1-210004.3"></a>Main Book Commands</h4> +<!--l. 1034--><p class="noindent" >All commands that are provided by the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class are also available with the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span> +class, but some commands might behave differently depending on whether they are in +the main part of the book or within the imported articles. +</p><!--l. 1039--><p class="indent" > In the main part of the book you can use the following commands: +</p><!--l. 1040--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\maketitle</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21001"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1042--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the book’s title page. Note that <span +class="ectt-1000">\maketitle </span>has a different effect when +used in imported articles. +</p><!--l. 1046--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\frontmatter</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\frontmatter </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1048--><p class="noindent" > +Use this command at the start of the front matter (e.g. before the foreword or preface). + + + +This will make chapters unnumbered even if you use <span +class="ectt-1000">\chapter </span>instead of <span +class="ectt-1000">\chapter*</span>. It +also sets the page style and sets the page numbering to lower case Roman +numerals. +</p><!--l. 1054--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">authorsignoff</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21003"></a><a + id="dx1-21004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{authorsignoff}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">author list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{authorsignoff} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1058--><p class="noindent" > +This environment may be used by the author signing off at the end of a chapter such as +the foreword. Within the environment use: +</p><!--l. 1061--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\Author</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\author{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">details</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1063--><p class="noindent" > +for the author’s details. More than one <span +class="ectt-1000">\Author </span>should be used if there is more than +one author. Example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-35"> +\begin{authorsignoff} + <br />\Author{Nicola Talbot\\ + <br />University of East Anglia} + <br />\Author{Anne Author\\ + <br />University of No Where} + <br />\end{authorsignoff} +</div> +<!--l. 1073--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1075--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">signoff</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21006"></a><a + id="dx1-21007"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{signoff}[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">team name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">date</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">editor list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{signoff} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1079--><p class="noindent" > +This environment may be used by the editorial team when signing off a chapter such +as the preface. If the optional argument is omitted, “The Editorial Team” is +used. +</p><!--l. 1084--><p class="indent" > Within the environment use: +</p><!--l. 1085--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\Editor</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\Editor{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">details</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1087--><p class="noindent" > +for each editor. Example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-36"> +\begin{signoff}{March 2010} + <br /> First editor: + <br />\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\ + <br />University of East Anglia\\ + <br />\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}} + <br /> Second editor: + <br />\Editor{Anne Editor\\ + <br />University of Nowhere\\ + <br />\mailto{ae@sample.com}} + <br />\end{signoff} +</div> +<!--l. 1100--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1102--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\tableofcontents</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21009"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\tableofcontents </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1104--><p class="noindent" > +This command displays the book’s table of contents. Note that it has a different effect if +used in an imported article. +</p><!--l. 1108--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\mainmatter</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21010"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\mainmatter </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1110--><p class="noindent" > +Use this command to switch to the book’s main matter. This will switch the chapter +numbering back on, reset the page numbering to Arabic and set up the main page +style. +</p><!--l. 1115--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\part</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21011"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\part[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1117--><p class="noindent" > +If used in the main part of the book, this command will start a new part and issue a +clear double page. Note that this command has a different effect if used in an imported +article. +</p><!--l. 1122--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\addtocpart</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21012"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\addtocpart{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1124--><p class="noindent" > +This adds <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>to the table of contents, issues a clear double page, but doesn’t display +any text or affect the part numbering. +</p><!--l. 1129--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\chapter</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21013"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\chapter[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1131--><p class="noindent" > +This command may be used in the main body of the book but will cause an error if +used within an imported article. +</p><!--l. 1135--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\section</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21014"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\section[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1137--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 1138--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsection</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21015"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1140--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 1141--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subsubsection</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21016"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1143--><p class="noindent" > + + + +</p><!--l. 1144--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\paragraph</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21017"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\paragraph[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1146--><p class="noindent" > +</p><!--l. 1147--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\subparagraph</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21018"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">short title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">title</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1149--><p class="noindent" > +These commands may be used in the main body of the book or within imported +articles. In the main body of the book they need to be within a chapter and will be +numbered according to the chapter. +</p><!--l. 1154--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\appendix</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21019"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\appendix </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1156--><p class="noindent" > +If used in the main body of the book, this will switch to the book appendices. +Subsequent <span +class="ectt-1000">\chapter </span>commands will produce the appendices. If used within an +imported article, it will switch to the article appendices and won’t affect the main part +of the book. +</p><!--l. 1163--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">jmlrpapers</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21020"></a><a + id="dx1-21021"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\begin{jmlrpapers}</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">imported papers</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><br +class="newline" /><span +class="ectt-1000">\end{jmlrpapers} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1167--><p class="noindent" > +This environment must be used when importing articles. Within this environment, use +the following commands to import articles: +</p><!--l. 1170--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\importpubpaper</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21022"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span> +</div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1172--><p class="noindent" > +This imports an article that has already been published elsewhere. The <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> +argument should be the page range from the <span +class="ecti-1000">previously published </span>version of this article. +This may not necessarily be the same as the page range of the article in the book. The +directory the imported file is contained in is is given by <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. If the +file is in the same directory as the book, use a dot. The file name is given by +<span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. The article is also given a label, specified by the optional argument. +This is <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>/<span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>by default. The label is used as a prefix to labels in +the imported articles which ensures that cross-references are unique. You can +also use this label to reference the article elsewhere in the book (see <a +href="#x1-220004.3.1">§4.3.1 +</a><a +href="#x1-220004.3.1">Cross-Referencing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:bkcrossref --></a>). +</p><!--l. 1186--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\importpaper</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21023"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpaper[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1188--><p class="noindent" > +Imports an article that is being published in the book. The arguments are the +same as above except that there is no page range (the page range is computed +automatically). +</p><!--l. 1193--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\importarticle</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-21024"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\importarticle[</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">]{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">directory</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">file</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1195--><p class="noindent" > +This imports an article that hasn’t been published elsewhere. There is no +page range, but the other arguments are the same as those describe above for +<span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span>. +</p><!--l. 1200--><p class="indent" > Example: to import a previously published paper <span +class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex </span>and an +unpublished paper <span +class="ectt-1000">paper2/paper2.tex</span>: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-37"> +\begin{jmlrpapers} + <br />\importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45} + <br />\importarticle{paper2}{paper2} + <br />\end{jmlrpapers} +</div> +<!--l. 1208--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1210--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 1210--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h5 class="subsubsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.3.1 </span> <a + id="x1-220004.3.1"></a>Cross-Referencing</h5> +<!--l. 1213--><p class="noindent" >You can cross-reference other parts of the book using the standard <span +class="ectt-1000">\label</span>/<span +class="ectt-1000">\ref</span> +mechanism, but if you want to reference something within an imported article, you +must prefix the label with the label given when importing the article (that is, the +optional argument to <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span><a + id="dx1-22001"></a>, <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpaper</span><a + id="dx1-22002"></a> or <span +class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span>). For +example, if you want to reference a section labeled <span +class="ectt-1000">sec:results </span>in the imported paper +<span +class="ectt-1000">paper1/paper1.tex</span>, you would need to do: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-38"> +see Section~\ref{paper1/paper1sec:results} +</div> +<!--l. 1223--><p class="nopar" > or + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-39"> +see \sectionref{paper1/paper1sec:results} +</div> +<!--l. 1227--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1229--><p class="indent" > In addition to the commands described in <a +href="#x1-140003.9">§3.9 </a><a +href="#x1-140003.9">Cross-Referencing<!--tex4ht:ref: sec:crossref --></a>, the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class +also provides the following cross-referencing commands: +</p><!--l. 1233--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\chapterref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-22003"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\chapterref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label list</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1235--><p class="noindent" > +Reference a chapter or chapters. The argument is a comma-separated list of +labels. +</p><!--l. 1239--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\articlepageref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-22004"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\articlepageref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1241--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the starting page number of the article whose label is given by <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. +Note that this must a single label, not a list. For example: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-40"> +An interesting article starts on page~\articlepageref{paper1/paper1} +</div> +<!--l. 1247--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1249--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\articlepagesref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-22005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\articlepagesref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1251--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the page range of the article whose label is given by <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. Again, this +must be a single label, not a list. This page range is unrelated to the <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pages</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>argument +of <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubarticle</span><a + id="dx1-22006"></a>. +</p><!--l. 1257--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\articletitleref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-22007"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\articletitleref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1259--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the short title for the article whose label is given by <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. Again, this +must be a single label, not a list. +</p><!--l. 1264--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\articleauthorref</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-22008"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\articleauthorref{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1266--><p class="noindent" > +This displays the author list for the article whose label is given by <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">label</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. Again, this +must be a single label, not a list. +</p><!--l. 1271--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 1271--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.4 </span> <a + id="x1-230004.4"></a>Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page</h4> +<!--l. 1274--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\titlebody</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-23001"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\titlebody </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1276--><p class="noindent" > +The main body of the book’s title page is given by the command <span +class="ectt-1000">\titlebody</span>. Within +the definition of this command, you can use: +</p><!--l. 1280--><p class="noindent" ><hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\SetTitleElement</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-23002"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">element</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pre</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">post</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">} </span></div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1282--><p class="noindent" > +where <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">element</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>can be: <span +class="ectt-1000">title</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">volume</span>, +<span +class="ectt-1000">issue</span><span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn2x0" id="fn2x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">2</sup></a></span><a + id="x1-23003f2"></a>, +<span +class="ectt-1000">subtitle</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">logo</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">team</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">author</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">date</span>, <span +class="ectt-1000">productioneditor</span>. The <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">pre</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>and <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">post</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>arguments +specify what to do before and after the element. Note that <span +class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement </span>does +nothing if that element hasn’t been set. For example, if <span +class="ectt-1000">\volume </span>has been omitted or +<span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\volume{}</span></span></span> is used, then + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-41"> +\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume} +</div> +<!--l. 1294--><p class="nopar" > will do nothing (so you don’t end up with <span +class="ecbx-1000">Volume :</span>). +</p><!--l. 1297--><p class="indent" > <hr><div title="Definition"><span class="marginpar"><span +class="ectt-0900">\IfTitleElement</span><span +class="ectt-0900"> </span></span><a + id="dx1-23005"></a> <span +class="ectt-1000">\IfTitleElement{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">element</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}{</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">}</span> +</div><hr> +</p><!--l. 1299--><p class="noindent" > +This does <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">true part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>if <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">element</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>has been set otherwise it does <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">false part</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. For +example, <span +class="ectt-1000">\postmainvolume </span>is defined as: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-42"> +\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{% + <br />  \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax + <br />} +</div> +<!--l. 1307--><p class="nopar" > This means that it will only print a colon after the volume number if the subtitle has +been set. +</p><!--l. 1311--><p class="indent" > The default definition of <span +class="ectt-1000">\titlebody </span>is: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-43"> +\newcommand{\titlebody}{% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}% + <br />  \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}% + <br />    {\postmainproductioneditor}% + <br />} +</div> +<!--l. 1323--><p class="nopar" > +</p><!--l. 1325--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 1325--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.5 </span> <a + id="x1-240004.5"></a>Potential Pitfalls</h4> +<!--l. 1327--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ecss-1000">combine</span><a + id="dx1-24001"></a> class and <span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref</span><a + id="dx1-24002"></a> package are individually both easily broken by packages +that change certain internals and they don’t ordinarily work together. The <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook</span> +class applies patches to the internal referencing mechanism to make them work +together, but it’s a fairly fragile alliance. Some packages are known to break it, for +example <span +class="ecss-1000">subfig</span><a + id="dx1-24003"></a>, <span +class="ecss-1000">pdfpages</span><a + id="dx1-24004"></a> and <span +class="ecss-1000">geometry</span><a + id="dx1-24005"></a>. This is why the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class checks for known +problem packages and generates an error message to dissuade authors from using them. +It’s likely that there are other packages that may cause a problem and, as they are +found, they will be added to the check list. Also, it’s possible for an author to disable +the package checking mechanism if they are determined to use a particular +package. +</p><!--l. 1341--><p class="indent" > In the event that an article has loaded a problem package, the editors will have to +decide whether to ask the author to change the article so that it doesn’t cause a +problem or to make the changes themselves or to find a way of fudging things to get it +to work. It depends on the level of <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> expertise amongst the editors and the time +available. +</p><!--l. 1348--><p class="indent" > Another problem that can arise is when different articles use packages that conflict. +For example, one article uses package <span +class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and another uses package <span +class="ecss-1000">bar</span>. Each article +compiles okay as a stand-alone article, but when combined <span +class="ecss-1000">foo </span>and <span +class="ecss-1000">bar </span>conflict. Another +problem may occur when articles load the same package but with conflicting package +options. To reduce the chance of this occurring, the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr </span>class loads some commonly +used packages. For example, it loads the <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-24006"></a> package with the <span +class="ecss-1000">algo2e </span>and <span +class="ecss-1000">ruled</span> +options and provides the <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm</span><a + id="dx1-24007"></a><a + id="dx1-24008"></a> environment in addition to <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-24009"></a>’s <span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e</span><a + id="dx1-24010"></a><a + id="dx1-24011"></a> +environment. +</p><!--l. 1360--><p class="indent" > Articles that use different input encodings can also cause a problem. For +example, if one article uses <span +class="ectt-1000">utf8 </span>and another uses <span +class="ectt-1000">latin1</span>. If the authors have + + + +directly entered a diacritic or ligature, such as é or æ, instead of using a +<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> command, such as <span +class="ectt-1000">\’e </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">\ae</span>, then this will cause an error on compiling the +book.<span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn3x0" id="fn3x0-bk"><sup class="textsuperscript">3</sup></a></span><a + id="x1-24012f3"></a> +The choice then is to either change all non-keyboard characters with the appropriate +<span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> commands or to use the <span +class="ectt-1000">\inputencoding </span>command, supplied by the <span +class="ecss-1000">inputenc</span><a + id="dx1-24013"></a> +package, to switch the encoding at the start of each article. +</p><!--l. 1372--><p class="indent" > Authors who use <span +class="ectt-1000">\nonumber </span>within an <span +class="ecss-1000">equation</span><a + id="dx1-24014"></a><a + id="dx1-24015"></a> environment can mess up the +hyperlinks. Remove <span +class="ectt-1000">\nonumber </span>and change the equation environment to <span +class="ectt-1000">\[ </span>… <span +class="ectt-1000">\] </span>(or +just make it a numbered equation). +</p><!--l. 1377--><p class="indent" > If the article changes the graphics path using <span +class="ectt-1000">\graphicspath</span>, <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>won’t +find the graphics if the imported articles aren’t in the same directory as the +book. +</p><!--l. 1381--><p class="noindent" > +</p> +<!--l. 1381--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h4 class="subsectionHead"><span class="titlemark">4.6 </span> <a + id="x1-250004.6"></a>Creating the Book Using <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span></h4> +<!--l. 1384--><p class="noindent" >The <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-25001"></a> Perl script is designed to make it easier to produce the print and +online versions of the book, as well as producing an HTML index of all the imported +articles with links to the abstracts and PDFs of individual articles. Note that for +it to work properly, the articles must be imported using <span +class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span>, +<span +class="ectt-1000">\importpaper </span>or <span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span>, and the imported articles must use the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr</span> +class. +</p><!--l. 1392--><p class="indent" > On UNIX style systems, the script can be invoked from a terminal using: +<spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h"> + <br /><span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook [</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">options</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">] </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span></span> +</p><!--l. 1396--><p class="indent" > <spacer type=vertical size=10> +If that doesn’t work, or you aren’t using a UNIX style operating system, the script can +be invoked from a terminal or command prompt using: <spacer type=vertical size=10><span class="obeylines-h"> + <br /><span +class="ectt-1000">perl makejmlrbook [</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">options</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-1000">] </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span></span> +</p><!--l. 1402--><p class="indent" > <spacer type=vertical size=10> +The mandatory argument <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">filename</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩ </span>is the name of the master <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> file containing the +book. It must use the <span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrbook </span>class. You may omit the <span +class="ectt-1000">.tex </span>extension. For +example, if the file is called <span +class="ectt-1000">proceedings.tex</span>, you can call <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-25002"></a> as +follows: + + + +</p> + <div class="verbatim" id="verbatim-44"> +perl makejmlrbook proceedings +</div> +<!--l. 1410--><p class="nopar" > This will create the files <span +class="ectt-1000">proceedings-print.pdf </span>(the print version) and +<span +class="ectt-1000">proceedings-online.pdf </span>(the online version). It will also create a directory +(folder) called <span +class="ectt-1000">html </span>in which the HTML files and individual article PDFs will be +placed. +</p><!--l. 1417--><p class="indent" > The options to <span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span><a + id="dx1-25003"></a> are as follows: + </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–online</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Generate the color on-line version (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–noonline</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Don’t generate the color on-line version. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–print</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Generate the grayscale print version (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–noprint</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Don’t generate the grayscale print version. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–html</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Generate the HTML files and the individual article PDFs (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–nohtml</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Don’t generate the HTML files and the individual article PDFs. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–logourl </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">url</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Make the logo on the HTML index page link to <span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-1000">url</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span>. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–batchtex</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Run <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> in batch mode. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–nobatchtex</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Don’t run <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> in batch mode (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–quieter</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Reduce chatter to STDOUT (doesn’t eliminate all messages). This also + runs <span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span> in batch mode. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–noquieter</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Don’t reduce messages to STDOUT (default). + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–version</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Display the version number and exit. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–help</span> </dt><dd +class="description">List all available options.</dd></dl> + + + +<!--l. 1438--><p class="indent" > There are also some more advanced options, but these haven’t been fully +tested: + </p><dl class="description"><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–latexapp </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Application used to call <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. Defaults to “pdflatex”. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–latexopt </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Options to pass to <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span>. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–format </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Output format (defaults to “pdf”). This may need to be + changed if you change the <span class="LATEX">L<span class="A">A</span><span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span></span> application. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–bibtexapp </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">name</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Application use to process the bibliography. Defaults to + “bibtex”. + </dd><dt class="description"> +<span +class="ecbx-1000">–bibtexopt </span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟨</span><span +class="ecbi-1000">string</span><span +class="cmsy-10">⟩</span> </dt><dd +class="description">Options to pass to Bib<span class="TEX">T<span +class="E">E</span>X</span>.</dd></dl> + + + +<!--l. 1453--><p class="indent" > <a + id="likesection.1"></a><a + id="Q1-1-27"></a> +</p> +<!--l. 2--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a></p><h3 class="likesectionHead"><a + id="x1-260004.6"></a>Index</h3> +<!--l. 4--><p class="noindent" > <span +class="ecbx-1000">Symbols</span> +</p> + <div class="theindex"><span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\\</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5020" ><span +class="ecti-1000">1</span></a> <br /></span> +<p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">A</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">abstract </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">2</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\acks</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">3</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\addr</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5021" ><span +class="ecti-1000">4</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\addtocpart</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">5</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">algorithm </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">6</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24007" ><span class="underline">7</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">algorithm2e </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">8</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24010" ><span class="underline">9</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">algorithm2e </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3007" >10</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11013" >11</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11014" >12</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24006" >13</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24009" >14</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\algorithmref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14009" ><span +class="ecti-1000">15</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">align </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15007" ><span class="underline">16</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15011" ><span class="underline">17</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15017" ><span class="underline">18</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">align* </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15009" ><span class="underline">19</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">altdescription </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">20</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">amsmath </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3002" >21</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15001" >22</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15002" >23</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15004" >24</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15025" >25</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">amssymb </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3003" >26</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\AND</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5019" ><span +class="ecti-1000">27</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\and</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5018" ><span +class="ecti-1000">28</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\appendix</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">29</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21019" ><span +class="ecti-1000">30</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\appendixref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">31</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\articleauthorref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">32</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\articlepageref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">33</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\articlepagesref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">34</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\articletitleref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">35</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\Author</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">36</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\author</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5013" ><span +class="ecti-1000">37</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20009" ><span +class="ecti-1000">38</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">authorsignoff </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">39</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">axiom </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13017" ><span class="underline">40</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\axiomref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14016" ><span +class="ecti-1000">41</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">B</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\bibliography</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">42</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">C</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\caption</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11003" ><span class="underline">43</span></a> <br /></span> + + + +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\chapter</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21013" ><span +class="ecti-1000">44</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\chapterref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">45</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\citep</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">46</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\citet</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">47</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item">class options:<br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">10pt</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19023" ><span class="underline">48</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">11pt</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19024" ><span class="underline">49</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">12pt</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19025" ><span class="underline">50</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">7x10</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19017" ><span class="underline">51</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">color</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4003" ><span class="underline">52</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19006" ><span class="underline">53</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">gray</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4004" ><span class="underline">54</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16003" ><span class="underline">55</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19007" ><span class="underline">56</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">letterpaper</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19016" ><span class="underline">57</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">nowcp</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4001" ><span class="underline">58</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19001" ><span class="underline">59</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">prehyperref</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19018" ><span class="underline">60</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19021" ><span class="underline">61</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">tablecaptionbottom</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4009" ><span class="underline">62</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19012" ><span class="underline">63</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">tablecaptiontop</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4005" ><span class="underline">64</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19008" ><span class="underline">65</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ecss-1000">wcp</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4002" ><span class="underline">66</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5008" ><span class="underline">67</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19002" ><span class="underline">68</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">combine </span>class  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2003" >69</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2004" >70</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3011" >71</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24001" >72</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">combnat </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3014" >73</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">conjecture </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13015" ><span class="underline">74</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\conjectureref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14015" ><span +class="ecti-1000">75</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">corollary </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13011" ><span class="underline">76</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\corollaryref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14013" ><span +class="ecti-1000">77</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">D</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15020" ><span +class="ecti-1000">78</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\DeclareMathOperator*</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15023" ><span class="underline">79</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">definition </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13013" ><span class="underline">80</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\definitionref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14014" ><span +class="ecti-1000">81</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">description </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12003" ><span class="underline">82</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">E</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\Editor</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">83</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\editor</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">84</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\editors</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">85</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\Email</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5017" ><span +class="ecti-1000">86</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">enumerate </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11005" ><span class="underline">87</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11009" ><span class="underline">88</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">enumerate* </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">89</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item">environments:<br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">abstract</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">90</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">algorithm</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">91</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24008" ><span class="underline">92</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">algorithm2e</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">93</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24011" ><span class="underline">94</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">align</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15008" ><span class="underline">95</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15012" ><span class="underline">96</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15018" ><span class="underline">97</span></a> <br /></span> + + + +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">align*</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15010" ><span class="underline">98</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">altdescription</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">99</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">authorsignoff</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">100</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">axiom</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13018" ><span class="underline">101</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">conjecture</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13016" ><span class="underline">102</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">corollary</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13012" ><span class="underline">103</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">definition</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13014" ><span class="underline">104</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">description</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-12004" ><span class="underline">105</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">enumerate</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11006" ><span class="underline">106</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11010" ><span class="underline">107</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">enumerate*</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">108</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">equation</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15006" ><span class="underline">109</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24015" ><span class="underline">110</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">example</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13004" ><span class="underline">111</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrpapers</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21021" ><span +class="ecti-1000">112</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">keywords</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">113</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">lemma</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13006" ><span class="underline">114</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">proof</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13020" ><span class="underline">115</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">proposition</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13008" ><span class="underline">116</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">remark</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13010" ><span class="underline">117</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">signoff</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">118</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">split</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15014" ><span class="underline">119</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">table</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4007" ><span class="underline">120</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4011" ><span class="underline">121</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19010" ><span class="underline">122</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19014" ><span class="underline">123</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-subitem">    <span +class="ectt-1000">theorem</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13002" ><span class="underline">124</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">epsfig </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3010" >125</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2013" >126</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">equation </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15005" ><span class="underline">127</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24014" ><span class="underline">128</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\equationref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">129</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">example </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13003" ><span class="underline">130</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\exampleref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14017" ><span +class="ecti-1000">131</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">F</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\figureref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">132</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\floatconts</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4008" ><span class="underline">133</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4012" ><span class="underline">134</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">135</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19011" ><span class="underline">136</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19015" ><span class="underline">137</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\frontmatter</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">138</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">G</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\gdef</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20002" ><span class="underline">139</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">geometry </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24005" >140</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2011" >141</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\global</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20003" ><span class="underline">142</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">graphicx </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3006" >143</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9002" >144</a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">H</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">hyperref </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2005" >145</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3012" >146</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19019" >147</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19020" >148</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19022" >149</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24002" >150</a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">I</span> + + + +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\ifprint</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">151</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\IfTitleElement</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">152</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\importarticle</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21024" ><span +class="ecti-1000">153</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\importpaper</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21023" ><span +class="ecti-1000">154</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22002" ><span class="underline">155</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubarticle</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22006" ><span class="underline">156</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\importpubpaper</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21022" ><span +class="ecti-1000">157</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-22001" ><span class="underline">158</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\includegraphics</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">159</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16001" ><span class="underline">160</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20013" ><span class="underline">161</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\includeteximage</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">162</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">inputenc </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24013" >163</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\intertext</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15016" ><span class="underline">164</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\issue</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23004" ><span class="underline">165</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">J</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">jmlr2e </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2001" >166</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3008" >167</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5001" >168</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5014" >169</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrnowcp</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">170</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">jmlrpapers </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21020" ><span +class="ecti-1000">171</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrproceedings</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">172</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrpublished</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5006" ><span +class="ecti-1000">173</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrsubmitted</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">174</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrvolume</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">175</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrwcp</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">176</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">jmlrwcp2e </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2002" >177</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3009" >178</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5002" >179</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5015" >180</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlrworkshop</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">181</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\jmlryear</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5004" ><span +class="ecti-1000">182</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">K</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">keywords </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">183</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">L</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\label</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-11004" ><span class="underline">184</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14001" ><span class="underline">185</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">lemma </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13005" ><span class="underline">186</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\lemmaref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">187</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\logo</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">188</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">M</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\mailto</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-6002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">189</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\mainmatter</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21010" ><span +class="ecti-1000">190</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">makejmlrbook</span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2015" >191</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2016" >192</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3016" >193</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-18001" >194</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25001" >195</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25002" >196</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-25003" >197</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\maketitle</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5009" ><span +class="ecti-1000">198</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">199</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">N</span> + + + +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\Name</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5016" ><span +class="ecti-1000">200</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">natbib </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3004" >201</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8001" >202</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-8005" >203</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\newcommand</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20004" ><span class="underline">204</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\newenvironment</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20005" ><span class="underline">205</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">O</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\operatorname</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15019" ><span +class="ecti-1000">206</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\operatorname*</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15022" ><span class="underline">207</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">P</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\paragraph</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21017" ><span +class="ecti-1000">208</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\part</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">209</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">pdfpages </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2007" >210</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24004" >211</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2010" >212</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\productioneditor</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20015" ><span +class="ecti-1000">213</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">proof </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13019" ><span class="underline">214</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">proposition </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13007" ><span class="underline">215</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">psfig </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2012" >216</a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">R</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">remark </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13009" ><span class="underline">217</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\remarkref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14012" ><span +class="ecti-1000">218</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\renewcommand</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20006" ><span class="underline">219</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\renewenvironment</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20007" ><span class="underline">220</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">S</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">scrartcl </span>class  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3001" >221</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\section</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7006" ><span +class="ecti-1000">222</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21014" ><span +class="ecti-1000">223</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\section*</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7007" ><span +class="ecti-1000">224</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\sectionref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">225</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\set</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">226</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">setspace </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3015" >227</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\SetTitleElement</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">228</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">signoff </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21006" ><span +class="ecti-1000">229</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">siunitx </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20001" >230</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">split </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15013" ><span class="underline">231</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">subfig </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2006" >232</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10001" >233</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-24003" >234</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2009" >235</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subfigref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">236</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subfigure</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10002" ><span +class="ecti-1000">237</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subparagraph</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21018" ><span +class="ecti-1000">238</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">239</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21015" ><span +class="ecti-1000">240</span></a> <br /></span> + + + +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subsection*</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7009" ><span +class="ecti-1000">241</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7010" ><span +class="ecti-1000">242</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21016" ><span +class="ecti-1000">243</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subsubsection*</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-7011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">244</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subtable</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-10003" ><span +class="ecti-1000">245</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subtabref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14006" ><span +class="ecti-1000">246</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\subtitle</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20011" ><span +class="ecti-1000">247</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\sum</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15021" ><span class="underline">248</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">T</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">table </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4006" ><span class="underline">249</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-4010" ><span class="underline">250</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19009" ><span class="underline">251</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-19013" ><span class="underline">252</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\tableofcontents</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-21009" ><span +class="ecti-1000">253</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\tableref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14005" ><span +class="ecti-1000">254</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\team</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20014" ><span +class="ecti-1000">255</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\text</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-15015" ><span class="underline">256</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ectt-1000">theorem </span>(environment)  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-13001" ><span class="underline">257</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">theorem </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-2014" >258</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\theoremref</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-14010" ><span +class="ecti-1000">259</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">tikz </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-9005" >260</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\title</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-5010" ><span +class="ecti-1000">261</span></a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20008" ><span +class="ecti-1000">262</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\titlebody</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-23001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">263</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">U</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\url</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-6001" ><span +class="ecti-1000">264</span></a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">url </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3005" >265</a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">V</span> +<span class="index-item"><span class="obeylines-h"><span class="verb"><span +class="ectt-1000">\volume</span></span></span>  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-20010" ><span +class="ecti-1000">266</span></a> <br /></span> +</p><p class="theindex"> <span +class="ecbx-1000">X</span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">xcolor </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16004" >267</a>, <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-16005" >268</a> <br /></span> +<span class="index-item"><span +class="ecss-1000">xkeyval </span>package  <a +href="jmlr-manual.html#dx1-3013" >269</a> <br /></span> +</p></div> +<!--l. 1453--><p class="noindent" ><a +href="#top">Top</a> +</p> + <div class="footnotes"><!--l. 51--><p class="indent" > <span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn1x0-bk" id="fn1x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">1</sup></a></span><span +class="ecrm-0800">Currently </span><span +class="ecss-0800">jmlr </span><span +class="ecrm-0800">will check if </span><span +class="ecss-0800">subfig</span><a + id="dx1-2009"></a><span +class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span +class="ecss-0800">pdfpages</span><a + id="dx1-2010"></a><span +class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span +class="ecss-0800">geometry</span><a + id="dx1-2011"></a><span +class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span +class="ecss-0800">psfig</span><a + id="dx1-2012"></a><span +class="ecrm-0800">, </span><span +class="ecss-0800">epsfig</span><a + id="dx1-2013"></a> <span +class="ecrm-0800">and </span><span +class="ecss-0800">theorem</span><a + id="dx1-2014"></a> <span +class="ecrm-0800">are loaded and</span> +<span +class="ecrm-0800">will throw an error. If other packages are found to be a problem, they will be added to the</span> +<span +class="ecrm-0800">list.</span></p><!--l. 1285--><p class="noindent" ><span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn2x0-bk" id="fn2x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">2</sup></a></span><span +class="ecrm-0800">The default title page layout doesn’t use </span><span +class="ectt-0800">issue</span><span +class="ecrm-0800">, but if required it can be set with</span> +<span +class="ectt-0800">\issue</span><a + id="dx1-23004"></a><span +class="ectt-0800">{</span><span +class="cmsy-8">⟨</span><span +class="ecti-0800">number</span><span +class="cmsy-8">⟩</span><span +class="ectt-0800">}</span></p> +<!--l. 1366--><p class="indent" > <span class="footnote-mark"><a +href="#fn3x0-bk" id="fn3x0"><sup class="textsuperscript">3</sup></a></span><span +class="ecrm-0800">and may also cause a problem for the editor’s text editor.</span></p> </div> + +</body></html> + + + + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..23ad3426b4a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual.tex @@ -0,0 +1,1455 @@ +\documentclass{nlctdoc} + +\usepackage{amsmath} +\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc} +\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} +\usepackage{ifthen} +\usepackage[colorlinks, + bookmarks, + hyperindex=false, + pdfauthor={Nicola L.C. Talbot}, + pdftitle={jmlr: LaTeX2e Classes for the Journal of Machine Learning Research}, + pdfkeywords={LaTeX,jmlr}]{hyperref} + +\CheckSum{3333} +\OnlyDescription + +\begin{document} +\MakeShortVerb{"} +\DeleteShortVerb{\|} + + \title{\LaTeXe\ Classes for the Journal of Machine +Learning Research} + \author{Nicola L. C. Talbot\\[10pt] +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/}} + + \date{2010-06-17 (version 1.06)} + \maketitle +\tableofcontents + +\section{Introduction} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is for articles that need to be formatted +according to the Journal of Machine Learning Research style. This +class is based on the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages +but has been adapted to enable it to work better with the +\cls{combine} class to collate the articles into a book. +\sectionref{sec:jmlr} describes how to use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. + +The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class is for combining JMLR articles into a book. +This class uses \cls{combine} and \sty{hyperref}, which are +troublesome enough on their own but together are quite fragile. The +\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class redefines some internals to get \clsfmt{combine} +and \clsfmt{hyperref} to work together but some packages (e.g.\ +\sty{subfig} and \sty{pdfpages}) are likely to mess everything up +and cause errors. This is why the guidelines to authors are fairly +stringent and why \clsfmt{jmlr} will give an error message if certain +packages are loaded.\footnote{Currently \clsfmt{jmlr} will check if +\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages}, \sty{geometry}, \sty{psfig}, +\sty{epsfig} and \sty{theorem} are loaded and will throw an error. +If other packages are found to be a problem, they will be added to +the list.} The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class works best with PDF\LaTeX\ so +authors should ensure that their articles can compile with +PDF\LaTeX. \sectionref{sec:jmlrbook} describes how to use the +\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class. + +The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script can be used to make a book that +uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class. In addition to creating the print +and online versions of the book, it will compile the individual +articles, running Bib\TeX\ where necessary, and create a set of +HTML files containing a list of all the articles imported into the +book along with links to the abstracts and PDFs of the individual +articles. \sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} describes how +to use the \app{makejmlrbook} application. + +\section{Required Packages} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class is based on the \cls{scrartcl} class and loads +the following packages: \sty{amsmath}, \sty{amssymb}, +\sty{natbib}, \sty{url}, \sty{graphicx} and \sty{algorithm2e}. +Note that unlike the \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e} packages, +this class file does not load the obsolete \sty{epsfig} package. + +The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class additionally loads the \cls{combine} class +and the following packages: \sty{hyperref}, \sty{xkeyval}, +\sty{combnat} and \sty{setspace}. + +The \app{makejmlrbook} script requires Perl, \TeX\ and \TeX4ht. + +\section{Guidelines for Article Authors} +\label{sec:jmlr} + +Article authors should use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. This class +comes with example files \texttt{jmlr-sample.tex} and +\texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex}, which can be used as templates. + +The following class options are available: +\begin{description} +\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The article is for the Journal of Machine +Learning Research (default). +\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The article is for JMLR Workshop and Conference +Proceedings. +\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}). + +\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}). + +\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment, +\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top. + +\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment, +\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom. +\end{description} + +\subsection{Title Information} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class uses different syntax from \sty{jmlr2e} and +\sty{jmlrwcp2e} to specify the title information. In particular, it +doesn't define \cs{jmlrheading} and \cs{ShortHeading}. Instead, the +following commands should be used: + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrvolume}] +\cs{jmlrvolume}\marg{number} +\end{definition} +This specifies the volume number. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\jmlrvolume{2} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlryear}] +\cs{jmlryear}\marg{year} +\end{definition} +This specifies the year. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\jmlryear{2010} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrsubmitted}] +\cs{jmlrsubmitted}\marg{date} +\end{definition} +This specifies the submission date. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrpublished}] +\cs{jmlrpublished}\marg{date} +\end{definition} +This specifies the publication date. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrworkshop}] +\cs{jmlrworkshop}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +This specifies the workshop title (for use with the \clsopt{wcp} +class option). + +The title information is specified using the commands described +below. These commands should typically go in the preamble. As +with most class files, The title itself is produced using +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}] +\cs{maketitle} +\end{definition} +This command should go after \verb|\begin{document}|. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{document} +\maketitle +\end{verbatim} +Before \cs{maketitle}, you must specify the title information +using the following commands: + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}] +\cs{title}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +This specifies the article's title. A short title for the page +header can be supplied via the optional argument \meta{short title}. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editor}] +\cs{editor}\marg{name} +\end{definition} +This specifies the editor's name. If there is more than one +editor, use: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\editors}] +\cs{editors}\marg{names} +\end{definition} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}] +\cs{author}\marg{author specs} +\end{definition} +This specifies the author. The specifications \meta{author specs} +are a bit different to \sty{jmlr2e} and \sty{jmlrwcp2e}. Use +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Name}] +\cs{Name}\marg{author's name} +\end{definition} +to specify the author's name. Note that if the surname contains a +space it must be grouped (enclosed in braces \{\}). Similarly if +the initial letter of each forename is a diacritic it must be +grouped. (See below for examples.) +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Email}] +\cs{Email}\marg{author's email} +\end{definition} +This specifies the author's email address. It should only be used +within the argument to \cs{author}. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\and}] +\cs{and} +\end{definition} +This should be used to separate two authors with the same address. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\AND}] +\cs{AND} +\end{definition} +This should be used to separate authors with different addresses. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\\}] +\verb|\\| +\end{definition} +This should be used before an author's address or between authors +with the same address where there are more that two authors. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addr}] +\cs{addr} +\end{definition} +This should be used at the start of the address. + +\begin{description} +\item[Example 1] Two authors with the same address: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{\Name{Jane Doe} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and + \Name{John {Basey Fisher}} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address} +\end{verbatim} +In this example, the second author has a space in his surname +so the surname needs to be grouped. + +\item[Example 2] Three authors with the same address: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{\Name{Fred Arnold {de la Cour}} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\ + \Name{Jack Jones} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\ + \Name{{\'E}louise {\'E}abhla Finchley} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address} +\end{verbatim} +In this example, the third author has an accent on her +forename initials so grouping is required. + +\item[Example 3] Authors with a different address: +\begin{verbatim} +\author{\Name{John Smith} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address 1 + \AND + \Name{May Brown} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address 2 + } +\end{verbatim} +\end{description} + +\subsection{Font Changing Commands} + +Use the \LaTeXe\ font changing commands, such as \cs{bfseries} or +\cs{textbf}\marg{text}, rather than the obsolete \LaTeX2.09 +commands, such as \cs{bf}. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\url}] +\cs{url}\marg{address} +\end{definition} +This will typeset \meta{address} in a typewriter font. Special +characters, such as \verb|~|, are correctly displayed. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\url{http://theoval.cmp.uea.ac.uk/~nlct/} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mailto}] +\cs{mailto}\marg{email address} +\end{definition} +This will typeset the given email address in a typewriter font. +Note that this is not the same as \cs{Email}, which should only be +used in the argument of \cs{author}. + +\subsection{Structure} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{abstract}] +\cs{begin}\{abstract\}\\ +\meta{text}\\ +\cs{end}\{abstract\} +\end{definition} +The abstract text should be displayed using the \envfmt{abstract} +environment. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{keywords}] +\cs{begin}\{keywords\}\meta{keyword list}\cs{end}\{keywords\} +\end{definition} +The keywords should be displayed using the \envfmt{keywords} +environment. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\acks}] +\cs{acks}\marg{text} +\end{definition} +This displays the acknowledgements. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}] +\cs{section}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +Section titles are created using \cs{section}. The heading is +automatically numbered and can be cross-referenced using +\cs{label} and \cs{ref}. Unnumbered sections can be produced +using: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section*}] +\cs{section*}\marg{title} +\end{definition} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}] +\cs{subsection}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +Sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsection}. Unnumbered +sub-sections can be produced using: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection*}] +\cs{subsection*}\marg{title} +\end{definition} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}] +\cs{subsubsection}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +Sub-sub-section titles are created using \cs{subsubsection}. +Unnumbered sub-sub-sections can be produced using: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection*}] +\cs{subsubsection*}\marg{title} +\end{definition} + +Further sectioning levels can be obtained using \cs{paragraph} +and \cs{subparagraph}, but these are unnumbered with running heads. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}] +\cs{appendix} +\end{definition} +Use \cs{appendix} to switch to the appendices. This changes +\cs{section} to produce an appendix. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\appendix +\section{Proof of Theorems} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Citations and Bibliography} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{natbib} and sets +the bibliography style to \texttt{plainnat}. References should +be stored in a \texttt{.bib} file. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\bibliography}] +\cs{bibliography}\marg{bib file} +\end{definition} +This displays the bibliography. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citep}] +\cs{citep}\oarg{pre note}\oarg{post note}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +Use \cs{citep} for a parenthetical citation. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\citet}] +\cs{citet}\oarg{note}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +Use \cs{citet} for a textual citation. + +See the \ctandoc{natbib} for further details. + +\subsection{Figures and Tables} + +Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving objects +and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient location. +Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In general +it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't put +the float in the middle of a paragraph (that is, make sure there's +a paragraph break above and below the float). Floats are supposed +to have a little extra space above and below them to make them +stand out from the rest of the text. This extra space is put in +automatically and shouldn't need modifying. + +To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the +format of the caption by doing something like: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}} +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\em A Sample Caption.} +\end{verbatim} +You can, of course, change the font for individual words or +phrases. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.} +\end{verbatim} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following command for displaying +the contents of a figure or table: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\floatconts}] +\cs{floatconts}\marg{label}\marg{caption command}\marg{contents} +\end{definition} +This ensures that the caption is correctly positioned and that +the contents are centered. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:example}% label + {\caption{An Example Table}}% caption command + {% + \begin{tabular}{ll} + \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + Data1 & 0.123456 + \end{tabular} + } +\end{table} +\end{verbatim} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class automatically loads \sty{graphicx} which +defines: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includegraphics}] +\cs{includegraphics}\oarg{options}\marg{file name} +\end{definition} +where \meta{options} is a comma-separated list of options. + +For example, suppose you have an image called +\texttt{mypic.png} in a subdirectory called \texttt{images}: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:example}% label + {\caption{An Example Figure}}% caption command + {\includegraphics[width=0.5\textwidth]{images/mypic}} +\end{figure} +\end{verbatim} + +Note that you shouldn't specify the file extension when including +the image. It's helpful if you can also provide a grayscale +version of color images. This should be labeled as the color +image but with \texttt{-gray} immediately before the extension. +(The extension need not be the same as that of the color image.) +For example, if you have an image called \texttt{mypic.pdf}, the +grayscale can be called \texttt{mypic-gray.pdf}, +\texttt{mypic-gray.png} or \texttt{mypic-gray.jpg}. +See \sectionref{sec:color} for further details. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\includeteximage}] +\cs{includeteximage}\oarg{options}\marg{file name} +\end{definition} +If your image file is made up of \LaTeX\ code (e.g.\ \sty{tikz} +commands) the file can be included using \cs{includeteximage}. +The optional argument is a key=value comma-separated list +where the keys are a subset of those provided by +\cs{includegraphics}. The main keys are: \texttt{width}, +\texttt{height}, \texttt{scale} and \texttt{angle}. + +\subsubsection{Sub-Figures and Sub-Tables} + +The \sty{subfig} package causes a problem for \clsfmt{jmlrbook} so +the \clsfmt{jmlr} class will give an error if it is used. Therefore +the \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides its own commands for including +sub-figures and sub-tables. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigure}] +\cs{subfigure}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents} +\end{definition} +This makes a sub-figure where \meta{contents} denotes the contents +of the sub-figure. This should also include the \cs{label}. +The first optional argument \meta{title} indicates a caption for +the sub-figure. By default, the sub-figures are aligned at the +base. This can be changed with the second optional argument +\meta{valign}, which may be one of: \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} +(centred) or \texttt{b} (base). + +For example, suppose there are two images files, \texttt{mypic1.png} +and \texttt{mypic2.png}, in the subdirectory \texttt{images}. +Then they can be included as sub-figures as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:example2}% label for whole figure + {\caption{An Example Figure.}}% caption for whole figure + {% + \subfigure{% + \label{fig:pic1}% label for this sub-figure + \includegraphics{images/mypic1} + }\qquad % space out the images a bit + \subfigure{% + \label{fig:pic2}% label for this sub-figure + \includegraphics{images/mypic2} + } + } +\end{figure} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtable}] +\cs{subtable}\oarg{title}\oarg{valign}\marg{contents} +\end{definition} +This is an analogous command for sub-tables. The default value +for \meta{valign} is \texttt{t}. + +\subsection{Algorithms} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm}] +\cs{begin}\{algorithm\}\\ +\meta{contents}\\ +\cs{end}\{algorithm\} +\end{definition} +Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the +\envfmt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use +\ics{caption} to set the caption (and \ics{label} to cross-reference +it). Within the body of the environment you can use the +\env{enumerate} environment. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{enumerate*}] +\cs{begin}\{enumerate*\}\\ +\cs{item} \meta{text}\\ +\ldots\\ +\cs{end}\{enumerate*\} +\end{definition} +If you want to have nested \env{enumerate} environments but you want +to keep the same numbering throughout the algorithm, you can use the +\envfmt{enumerate*} environment, provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr} +class. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{enumerate*} + \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0 + \item Set $i=0$ + \begin{enumerate*} + \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices + adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$ + \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled, + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and + the length is given by the label of $t$. + \end{enumerate*} + otherwise + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate} + \end{enumerate*} + \end{enumerate*} +\end{enumerate*} +\end{algorithm} +\end{verbatim} + + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{algorithm2e}] +\cs{begin}\{algorithm2e\}\\ +\meta{contents}\\ +\cs{end}\{algorithm2e\} +\end{definition} +Pseudo code can be displayed using the \envfmt{algorithm2e} environment, +provided by the \sty{algorithm2e} package, which is automatically +loaded. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{algorithm2e} +\caption{Computing Net Activation} +\label{alg:net} +\dontprintsemicolon +\linesnumbered +\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$} +\KwOut{$y$, the net activation} +$y\leftarrow 0$\; +\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{ + $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\; +} +\end{algorithm2e} +\end{verbatim} + +See the \ctandoc{algorithm2e} for more details. + +\subsection{Description Lists} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{altdescription}] +\cs{begin}\{altdescription\}\marg{widest label}\\ +\cs{item}\oarg{label} \meta{item text}\\ +\cs{end}\{altdescription\} +\end{definition} +In addition to the standard \env{description} environment, the +\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \envfmt{altdescription} environment. +This has an argument that should be the widest label used in the +list. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{altdescription}{differentiate} +\item[add] A method that adds two variables. +\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. +\end{altdescription} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Theorems, Lemmas etc} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides the following theorem-like +environments: \env{theorem}, \env{example}, \env{lemma}, +\env{proposition}, \env{remark}, \env{corollary}, \env{definition}, +\env{conjecture} and \env{axiom}. Within the body of those +environments, you can use the \env{proof} environment to display the +proof if need be. The theorem-like environments all take an +optional argument, which gives the environment a title. For example: + +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{theorem}[An Example Theorem] +\label{thm:example} +This is the theorem. +\begin{proof} +This is the proof. +\end{proof} +\end{theorem} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Cross-Referencing} +\label{sec:crossref} + +Always use \ics{label} when cross-referencing, rather than writing +the number explicitly. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class provides some +convenience commands to assist referencing. These commands, +described below, can all take a comma-separated list of labels. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\sectionref}] +\cs{sectionref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a section or sections. For example, if you defined +a section as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} +\end{verbatim} +you can refer to it as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +The results are detailed in \sectionref{sec:results}. +\end{verbatim} +This command may also be used for sub-sections and sub-sub-sections. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendixref}] +\cs{appendixref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to an appendix or multiple appendices. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\equationref}] +\cs{equationref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to an equation or multiple equations. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableref}] +\cs{tableref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a table or multiple tables. This can also be +used for sub-tables where the main table number is also required. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtabref}] +\cs{subtabref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to sub-tables without the main table number, e.g. +(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\figureref}] +\cs{figureref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a figure or multiple figures. This can also +be used for sub-figures where the main figure number is also +required, e.g.\ 2(\emph{a}) or 4(\emph{b}). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subfigref}] +\cs{subfigref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to sub-figures without the main figure number, e.g. +(\emph{a}) or (\emph{b}). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\algorithmref}] +\cs{algorithmref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to an algorithm or multiple algorithms. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\theoremref}] +\cs{theoremref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a theorem or multiple theorems. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\lemmaref}] +\cs{lemmaref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a lemma or multiple lemmas. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\remarkref}] +\cs{remarkref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a remark or multiple remarks. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\corollaryref}] +\cs{corollaryref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a corollary or multiple corollaries. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\definitionref}] +\cs{definitionref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a definition or multiple definitions. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\conjectureref}] +\cs{conjectureref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to a conjecture or multiple conjectures. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\axiomref}] +\cs{axiomref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to an axiom or multiple axioms. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\exampleref}] +\cs{exampleref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Used to refer to an example or multiple examples. + +\subsection{Mathematics} + +The \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads the \sty{amsmath} package so you can use +any of the commands and environments defined in that package. A +brief summary of some of the more common commands and environments +is provided here. See the \ctandoc{amsmath} for further details. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\set}] +\cs{set}\marg{text} +\end{definition} +In addition to the commands provided by \sty{amsmath}, the +\clsfmt{jmlr} class also provides the \cs{set} command which can +be used to typeset a set. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +The universal set is denoted $\set{U}$ +\end{verbatim} + +Unnumbered single-line equations should be displayed using +\cs{[} and \cs{]}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\[E = m c^2\] +\end{verbatim} +Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the +\env{equation} environment. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule} +\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1 +\end{equation} +\end{verbatim} +Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the +\env{align} environment. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{align} +f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\ +f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df} +\end{align} +\end{verbatim} +Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the +\env{align*} environment. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{align*} +f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\ +&= x^2 - 1 +\end{align*} +\end{verbatim} +If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the +\env{align} environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with +\cs{nonumber}. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{align} +y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\ +&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y} +\end{align} +\end{verbatim} +An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be +displayed using the \env{split} environment. + +Text can be embedded in an equation using \ics{text}\marg{text} or +you can use \ics{intertext}\marg{text} to interupt a multi-line +environment such as \env{align}. + +Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}. +For additional operators, either use +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\operatorname}] +\cs{operatorname}\marg{name} +\end{definition} +for example +\begin{verbatim} +If $X$ and $Y$ are independent, +$\operatorname{var}(X+Y) = +\operatorname{var}(X) + \operatorname{var}(Y)$ +\end{verbatim} +or declare it with +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMathOperator}] +\cs{DeclareMathOperator}\marg{command}\marg{name} +\end{definition} +for example +\begin{verbatim} +\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var} +\end{verbatim} +and then use this new command: +\begin{verbatim} +If $X$ and $Y$ are independent, +$\var(X+Y) = \var(X)+\var(Y)$ +\end{verbatim} + +If you want limits that go above and +below the operator (like \ics{sum}) use the starred versions +(\ics{operatorname*} or \ics{DeclareMathOperator*}). + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from + \sty{amsmath} documentation)} +\label{tab:operatornames}% +\vskip\baselineskip +\centering +\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl} +\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\ +\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\ +\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\ +\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\ +\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\ +\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\ +\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\ +\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\ +\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$ +\end{tabular}\par +\begin{tabular}{rlrl} +\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$ +& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\ +\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$ +& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$ +\end{tabular} + +\end{table} + +\subsection{Color vs Grayscale} +\label{sec:color} + +It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their +articles in the event that the article is to be incorporated into +a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG +graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the +file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png}, +then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or +\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't +need to modify your code. The \clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for +the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode +(provided you have used \ics{includegraphics} and haven't +specified the file extension). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\ifprint}] +\cs{ifprint}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} +\end{definition} +You can use \cs{ifprint} to determine which mode you are in. +For example: +\begin{verbatim} +in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the +\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} +ellipse represents an input and the +\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse +represents an output. +\end{verbatim} +Another example: +\begin{verbatim} +{\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!} +\end{verbatim} + +You can use the class option \clsopt{gray} to see how the +document will appear in gray scale mode. + +The \sty{xcolor} class is loaded with the \pkgoptfmt{x11names} +option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed +in the \ctandoc{xcolor}). + +\subsection{Where To Go For Help} + +If you have a \LaTeX\ query, the first place to go to is the +\urlfootref{http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq}{UK TUG FAQ}. + +If you are unfamiliar or just getting started with \LaTeX, there's +a list of on-line introductions to \LaTeX\ at: +\url{http://www.tex.ac.uk/cgi-bin/texfaq2html?label=man-latex} + +There are also forums, mailing lists and newsgroups. For example, +the \LaTeX\ Community (\url{http://www.latex-community.org/}), +the \texttt{texhax} mailing list +(\url{http://tug.org/mailman/listinfo/texhax}) and +\texttt{comp.text.tex} (archives available at +\url{http://groups.google.com/group/comp.text.tex/}). + +Documentation for packages or classes can be found using the +\texttt{texdoc} application. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +texdoc natbib +\end{verbatim} +Alternatively, you can go to +\texttt{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/}\meta{name} where +\meta{name} is the name of the package. For example: +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib} + +For a general guide to preparing papers (regardless of whether you +are using \LaTeX\ or a word processor), see Kate L.~Turabian, \qt{A +manual for writers of term papers, theses, and dissertations}, The +University of Chicago Press, 1996. + +\section{Guidelines for Production Editors} +\label{sec:jmlrbook} + +The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class can be used to combine articles that +use the \clsfmt{jmlr} document class into a book. The following sample +files are provided: \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex}, +\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}, \texttt{paper3/paper3.tex}, +\texttt{jmlr-sample.tex}, \texttt{jmlrwcp-sample.tex} and +\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}. All but the last named one are +articles using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. The last one +(\texttt{jmlrbook-sample.tex}) uses the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class file to +combine the articles into a book. Note that no modifications are +needed to the files using the \clsfmt{jmlr} class when they are +imported into the book. They can either be compiled as stand-alone +articles or with the entire book. + +Before you compile the book, make sure that all the articles +compile as stand-alone documents (and run Bib\TeX\ where +necessary). You can use the \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script to compile +the book and create associated HTML files. See +\sectionref{sec:makejmlrbook} for details. + +\subsection{\clsfmt{jmlrbook} Class Options} +\begin{description} +\item[\clsopt{nowcp}]The imported pre-published articles were +published in the Journal of Machine Learning Research (default). +\item[\clsopt{wcp}] The imported pre-published articles were +published in the JMLR Workshop and Conference Proceedings. + +If the book has a mixture of JMLR and JMLR WCP articles, you +can switch between them using +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrwcp}] +\cs{jmlrwcp} +\end{definition} +and +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrnowcp}] +\cs{jmlrnowcp} +\end{definition} +Alternatively, you can set the name of the journal or conference +proceedings using: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\jmlrproceedings}] +\cs{jmlrproceedings}\marg{short title}\marg{long title} +\end{definition} + +\item[\clsopt{color}] Color version (see \sectionref{sec:color}). +Use this option for the on-line version with hyperlinks enabled +(default). + +\item[\clsopt{gray}] Grayscale version (see \sectionref{sec:color}). +Use this option for the print version without hyperlinks. + +\item[\clsopt{tablecaptiontop}] in a \env{table} environment, +\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the top. + +\item[\clsopt{tablecaptionbottom}] in a \env{table} environment, +\ics{floatconts} puts the caption at the bottom. + +\item[\clsopt{letterpaper}] Set the paper size to letter (default). + +\item[\clsopt{7x10}] Set the paper size to $7\times10$ inches. + +\item[\clsopt{prehyperref}] The \clsfmt{jmlrbook} automatically loads +the \sty{hyperref} package, but some packages need to be loaded +before \sty{hyperref}. This information can be specified using +the \clsopt{prehyperref} option. This is a key=value option. For +example, to load the packages \styfmt{foo} and \styfmt{bar} before +\sty{hyperref}, you can do: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}}]{jmlrbook} +\end{verbatim} +or: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}}]{jmlrbook} +\end{verbatim} + +\item[\clsopt{10pt}] Use 10pt as the normal text size. +\item[\clsopt{11pt}] Use 11pt as the normal text size (default). +\item[\clsopt{12pt}] Use 12pt as the normal text size. + +\end{description} + +\subsection{The Preamble} + +Any packages that the imported articles load (which aren't +automatically loaded by \clsfmt{jmlr}) must be loaded in the book's +preamble. For example, if one or more of the articles load the +\sty{siunitx} package, this package must be loaded in the book. + +Commands that are defined in the imported articles will be local +to that article unless they have been globally defined using +\ics{gdef} or \ics{global}. Since most authors use \ics{newcommand} +and \ics{newenvironment} (or \ics{renewcommand} and +\ics{renewenvironment}) this shouldn't cause a conflict if more +that one article has defined the same command or environment. +For example, in the sample files supplied, both +\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and \texttt{paper2/paper2.tex} have +defined the command \cs{samplecommand} using \cs{newcommand}. As +long as this command isn't also defined in the book, there won't +be a conflict. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\title}] +\cs{title}\oarg{PDF title}\marg{book title} +\end{definition} +In the book preamble, \cs{title} sets the book title and the optional +argument is used for the PDF title, which will be displayed +when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their PDF viewer. +(Note that in the imported articles, \cs{title} sets the article's +title and the optional argument sets the short title for the +page header and table of contents.) + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\author}] +\cs{author}\oarg{PDF author(s)}\marg{book author(s)} +\end{definition} +In the book preamble, \cs{author} sets the book's author (or editor) +and the optional argument is used for the PDF author, which will be +displayed when the reader views the PDF file's properties in their +PDF viewer. (Note that in the imported articles, \cs{author} sets +the article's author and the optional argument sets the short author +list for the page header.) + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\volume}] +\cs{volume}\marg{number} +\end{definition} +This command sets the book's volume number. Omit if the book has no +volume number. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subtitle}] +\cs{subtitle}\marg{sub-title} +\end{definition} +This command sets the book's subtitle. Omit if the book has no +sub-title. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\logo}] +\cs{logo}\marg{image command} +\end{definition} +This sets the book's title image. Use \ics{includegraphics} and +omit the file extension. If you provide a grayscale version as +well as a color version, the grayscale version will be used for +the print version of the book. (See \sectionref{sec:color} +for further details.) + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\team}] +\cs{team}\marg{team title} +\end{definition} +This can be used to set the name of the editorial team. This +command may be omitted if not required. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\productioneditor}] +\cs{productioneditor}\marg{name} +\end{definition} +This command may be used to name the production editor. The command +may be omitted if not required. + +See \sectionref{sec:modifytitle} for details on how to modify the +layout of the title page. + +\subsection{Main Book Commands} + +All commands that are provided by the \clsfmt{jmlr} class are +also available with the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class, but some commands +might behave differently depending on whether they are in the +main part of the book or within the imported articles. + +In the main part of the book you can use the following commands: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\maketitle}] +\cs{maketitle} +\end{definition} +This displays the book's title page. Note that \cs{maketitle} has +a different effect when used in imported articles. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\frontmatter}] +\cs{frontmatter} +\end{definition} +Use this command at the start of the front matter (e.g.\ before the +foreword or preface). This will make chapters unnumbered even if you +use \cs{chapter} instead of \cs{chapter*}. It also sets the page +style and sets the page numbering to lower case Roman numerals. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{authorsignoff}] +\cs{begin}\{authorsignoff\}\\ +\meta{author list}\\ +\cs{end}\{authorsignoff\} +\end{definition} +This environment may be used by the author signing off at the end of a chapter such as the +foreword. Within the environment use: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Author}] +\cs{author}\marg{details} +\end{definition} +for the author's details. More than one \cs{Author} should be used +if there is more than one author. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{authorsignoff} +\Author{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia} +\Author{Anne Author\\ +University of No Where} +\end{authorsignoff} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{signoff}] +\cs{begin}\{signoff\}\oarg{team name}\marg{date}\\ +\meta{editor list}\\ +\cs{end}\{signoff\} +\end{definition} +This environment may be used by the editorial team when signing off +a chapter such as the preface. If the optional argument is omitted, +\qt{The Editorial Team} is used. + +Within the environment use: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\Editor}] +\cs{Editor}\marg{details} +\end{definition} +for each editor. Example: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{signoff}{March 2010} +% First editor: +\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia\\ +\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}} +% Second editor: +\Editor{Anne Editor\\ +University of Nowhere\\ +\mailto{ae@sample.com}} +\end{signoff} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\tableofcontents}] +\cs{tableofcontents} +\end{definition} +This command displays the book's table of contents. Note that it +has a different effect if used in an imported article. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\mainmatter}] +\cs{mainmatter} +\end{definition} +Use this command to switch to the book's main matter. This will +switch the chapter numbering back on, reset the page numbering to +Arabic and set up the main page style. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\part}] +\cs{part}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +If used in the main part of the book, this command will start a +new part and issue a clear double page. Note that this command +has a different effect if used in an imported article. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\addtocpart}] +\cs{addtocpart}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +This adds \meta{title} to the table of contents, issues a clear +double page, but doesn't display any text or affect the part +numbering. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapter}] +\cs{chapter}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +This command may be used in the main body of the book but will +cause an error if used within an imported article. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\section}] +\cs{section}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsection}] +\cs{subsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subsubsection}] +\cs{subsubsection}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\paragraph}] +\cs{paragraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\subparagraph}] +\cs{subparagraph}\oarg{short title}\marg{title} +\end{definition} +These commands may be used in the main body of the book or within +imported articles. In the main body of the book they need to be +within a chapter and will be numbered according to the chapter. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\appendix}] +\cs{appendix} +\end{definition} +If used in the main body of the book, this will switch to the +book appendices. Subsequent \cs{chapter} commands will produce the +appendices. If used within an imported article, it will switch +to the article appendices and won't affect the main part of +the book. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeEnv{jmlrpapers}] +\cs{begin}\{jmlrpapers\}\\ +\meta{imported papers}\\ +\cs{end}\{jmlrpapers\} +\end{definition} +This environment must be used when importing articles. Within this +environment, use the following commands to import articles: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpubpaper}] +\cs{importpubpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file}\marg{pages} +\end{definition} +This imports an article that has already been published elsewhere. +The \meta{pages} argument should be the page range from the +\emph{previously published} version of this article. This may not +necessarily be the same as the page range of the article in the book. +The directory the imported file is contained in is is given by +\meta{directory}. If the file is in the same directory as the +book, use a dot. The file name is given by \meta{file}. The article +is also given a label, specified by the optional argument. This +is \meta{directory}/\meta{file} by default. The label is used +as a prefix to labels in the imported articles which ensures that +cross-references are unique. You can also use this label to reference +the article elsewhere in the book (see \sectionref{sec:bkcrossref}). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importpaper}] +\cs{importpaper}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file} +\end{definition} +Imports an article that is being published in the book. The +arguments are the same as above except that there is no page +range (the page range is computed automatically). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\importarticle}] +\cs{importarticle}\oarg{label}\marg{directory}\marg{file} +\end{definition} +This imports an article that hasn't been published elsewhere. There +is no page range, but the other arguments are the same as +those describe above for \cs{importpubpaper}. + +Example: to import a previously published paper +\texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and an unpublished paper +\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex}: +\begin{verbatim} +\begin{jmlrpapers} +\importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45} +\importarticle{paper2}{paper2} +\end{jmlrpapers} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsubsection{Cross-Referencing} +\label{sec:bkcrossref} + +You can cross-reference other parts of the book using the +standard \cs{label}/\cs{ref} mechanism, but if you want to +reference something within an imported article, you must prefix +the label with the label given when importing the article (that +is, the optional argument to \ics{importpubpaper}, +\ics{importpaper} or \cs{importarticle}). For example, if you +want to reference a section labeled \texttt{sec:results} in the +imported paper \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex}, you would need to do: +\begin{verbatim} +see Section~\ref{paper1/paper1sec:results} +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +see \sectionref{paper1/paper1sec:results} +\end{verbatim} + +In addition to the commands described in \sectionref{sec:crossref}, +the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} class also provides the following +cross-referencing commands: + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\chapterref}] +\cs{chapterref}\marg{label list} +\end{definition} +Reference a chapter or chapters. The argument is a comma-separated +list of labels. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepageref}] +\cs{articlepageref}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +This displays the starting page number of the article whose label +is given by \meta{label}. Note that this must a single label, not +a list. For example: +\begin{verbatim} +An interesting article starts on page~\articlepageref{paper1/paper1} +\end{verbatim} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articlepagesref}] +\cs{articlepagesref}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +This displays the page range of the article whose label is +given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a +list. This page range is unrelated to the \meta{pages} argument of +\ics{importpubarticle}. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articletitleref}] +\cs{articletitleref}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +This displays the short title for the article whose label is +given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a +list. + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\articleauthorref}] +\cs{articleauthorref}\marg{label} +\end{definition} +This displays the author list for the article whose label is +given by \meta{label}. Again, this must be a single label, not a +list. + +\subsection{Altering the Layout of the Main Title Page} +\label{sec:modifytitle} + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\titlebody}] +\cs{titlebody} +\end{definition} +The main body of the book's title page is given by the command +\cs{titlebody}. Within the definition of this command, you can +use: +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\SetTitleElement}] +\cs{SetTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{pre}\marg{post} +\end{definition} +where \meta{element} can be: \texttt{title}, \texttt{volume}, +\texttt{issue}\footnote{The default title page layout doesn't use +\texttt{issue}, but if required it can be set with \ics{issue}\marg{number}}, +\texttt{subtitle}, \texttt{logo}, \texttt{team}, \texttt{author}, +\texttt{date}, \texttt{productioneditor}. The \meta{pre} and +\meta{post} arguments specify what to do before and after the +element. Note that \cs{SetTitleElement} does nothing if that +element hasn't been set. For example, if \cs{volume} has been +omitted or \verb|\volume{}| is used, then +\begin{verbatim} +\SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume} +\end{verbatim} +will do nothing (so you don't end up with \textbf{Volume :}). + +\begin{definition}[\DescribeMacro{\IfTitleElement}] +\cs{IfTitleElement}\marg{element}\marg{true part}\marg{false part} +\end{definition} +This does \meta{true part} if \meta{element} has been set +otherwise it does \meta{false part}. For example, +\cs{postmainvolume} is defined as: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\postmainvolume}{% + \IfTitleElement{subtitle}{}{:}\par\relax +} +\end{verbatim} +This means that it will only print a colon after the volume +number if the subtitle has been set. + +The default definition of \cs{titlebody} is: +\begin{verbatim} +\newcommand{\titlebody}{% + \SetTitleElement{title}{\maintitlefont}{\postmaintitle}% + \SetTitleElement{volume}{\mainvolumefont}{\postmainvolume}% + \SetTitleElement{subtitle}{\mainsubtitlefont}{\postmainsubtitle}% + \SetTitleElement{logo}{\mainlogofont}{\postmainlogo}% + \SetTitleElement{team}{\mainteamfont}{\postmainteam}% + \SetTitleElement{author}{\mainauthorfont}{\postmainauthor}% + \SetTitleElement{productioneditor}{\mainproductioneditorfont}% + {\postmainproductioneditor}% +} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Potential Pitfalls} + +The \cls{combine} class and \sty{hyperref} package are +individually both easily broken by packages that change certain +internals and they don't ordinarily work together. The +\clsfmt{jmlrbook} class applies patches to the internal referencing +mechanism to make them work together, but it's a fairly fragile +alliance. Some packages are known to break it, for example +\sty{subfig}, \sty{pdfpages} and \sty{geometry}. This is why the +\clsfmt{jmlr} class checks for known problem packages and generates an +error message to dissuade authors from using them. It's likely that +there are other packages that may cause a problem and, as they are +found, they will be added to the check list. Also, it's possible for +an author to disable the package checking mechanism if they are +determined to use a particular package. + +In the event that an article has loaded a problem package, the +editors will have to decide whether to ask the author to change +the article so that it doesn't cause a problem or to make the changes +themselves or to find a way of fudging things to get it to work. It +depends on the level of \LaTeX\ expertise amongst the editors and +the time available. + +Another problem that can arise is when different articles use +packages that conflict. For example, one article uses package +\styfmt{foo} and another uses package \styfmt{bar}. Each article compiles +okay as a stand-alone article, but when combined \styfmt{foo} and +\styfmt{bar} conflict. Another problem may occur when articles load the +same package but with conflicting package options. To reduce the +chance of this occurring, the \clsfmt{jmlr} class loads some commonly +used packages. For example, it loads the \sty{algorithm2e} +package with the \pkgoptfmt{algo2e} and \pkgoptfmt{ruled} options and +provides the \env{algorithm} environment in addition to +\sty{algorithm2e}'s \env{algorithm2e} environment. + +Articles that use different input encodings can also cause a +problem. For example, if one article uses \texttt{utf8} and another +uses \texttt{latin1}. If the authors have directly entered a +diacritic or ligature, such as \'e or \ae, instead of using a +\LaTeX\ command, such as \cs{'e} or \cs{ae}, then +this will cause an error on compiling the book.\footnote{and may also +cause a problem for the editor's text editor.} The choice then is to +either change all non-keyboard characters with the appropriate +\LaTeX\ commands or to use the \cs{inputencoding} command, supplied +by the \sty{inputenc} package, to switch the encoding at the start +of each article. + +Authors who use \cs{nonumber} within an \env{equation} environment +can mess up the hyperlinks. Remove \cs{nonumber} and change the +equation environment to \cs{[} \ldots\ \cs{]} (or just make it a +numbered equation). + +If the article changes the graphics path using \cs{graphicspath}, +\clsfmt{jmlrbook} won't find the graphics if the imported articles +aren't in the same directory as the book. + +\subsection{Creating the Book Using \appfmt{makejmlrbook}} +\label{sec:makejmlrbook} + +The \app{makejmlrbook} Perl script is designed to make it +easier to produce the print and online versions of the book, as +well as producing an HTML index of all the imported articles with +links to the abstracts and PDFs of individual articles. Note that +for it to work properly, the articles must be imported using +\cs{importarticle}, \cs{importpaper} or \cs{importpubpaper}, and +the imported articles must use the \clsfmt{jmlr} class. + +On UNIX style systems, the script can be invoked from a terminal +using: +\begin{prompt} +makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename} +\end{prompt} +If that doesn't work, or you aren't using a UNIX style operating +system, the script can be invoked from a terminal or command +prompt using: +\begin{prompt} +perl makejmlrbook \oarg{options} \meta{filename} +\end{prompt} +The mandatory argument \meta{filename} is the name of the master +\TeX\ file containing the book. It must use the \clsfmt{jmlrbook} +class. You may omit the \texttt{.tex} extension. For example, if +the file is called \texttt{proceedings.tex}, you can call +\app{makejmlrbook} as follows: +\begin{verbatim} +perl makejmlrbook proceedings +\end{verbatim} +This will create the files \texttt{proceedings-print.pdf} (the +print version) and \texttt{proceedings-online.pdf} (the online +version). It will also create a directory (folder) called +\texttt{html} in which the HTML files and individual article PDFs +will be placed. + +The options to \app{makejmlrbook} are as follows: +\begin{description} +\item[--online] Generate the color on-line version (default). +\item[--noonline] Don't generate the color on-line version. +\item[--print] Generate the grayscale print version (default). +\item[--noprint] Don't generate the grayscale print version. +\item[--html] Generate the HTML files and the individual article +PDFs (default). +\item[--nohtml] Don't generate the HTML files and the individual +article PDFs. +\item[--logourl \meta{url}] Make the logo on the HTML index page link +to \meta{url}. +\item[--batchtex] Run \TeX\ in batch mode. +\item[--nobatchtex] Don't run \TeX\ in batch mode (default). +\item[--quieter] Reduce chatter to STDOUT (doesn't eliminate +all messages). This also runs \TeX\ in batch mode. +\item[--noquieter] Don't reduce messages to STDOUT (default). +\item[--version] Display the version number and exit. +\item[--help] List all available options. +\end{description} + +There are also some more advanced options, but these haven't been +fully tested: +\begin{description} +\item[--latexapp \meta{name}] Application used to call \LaTeX. +Defaults to \qt{pdflatex}. +\item[--latexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to \LaTeX. +\item[--format \meta{string}] Output format (defaults to \qt{pdf}). +This may need to be changed if you change the \LaTeX\ application. +\item[--bibtexapp \meta{name}] Application use to process the +bibliography. Defaults to \qt{bibtex}. +\item[--bibtexopt \meta{string}] Options to pass to Bib\TeX. +\end{description} + +\StopEventually{\clearpage\phantomsection + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Index}\PrintIndex +} + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..33ca3b6ac84 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual0x.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..176ef49b60f --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual1x.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..c180200b7f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual2x.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..d89cbb940a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr-manual3x.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..2dc5d92d1df --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/jmlr.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..3baf8157e9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo-gray.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e9ae63dacf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/bookLogo.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..98a39dfdb05 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/jmlrbook-sample.tex @@ -0,0 +1,233 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlrbook}% on-line color version +%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlrbook}% print version + +% Packages used by imported articles: +\usepackage{lipsum} +\usepackage{booktabs} +\usepackage{siunitx} + +% Title is added to the PDF properties. Optional argument +% is used instead, if present. +%\title[Short Title]{Big Long Title} +\title{A Sample Book} + +\author[Anne Editor et al.]{Anne Editor, Anne Other Editor and Nicola Talbot} + +\volume{1} +\subtitle{Making a Book from JMLR Articles} +\logo{\includegraphics{bookLogo}} +\team{The Sample Book Team} + +\productioneditor{Nicola Talbot} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\frontmatter + +\chapter{Foreword} + +This is an example book that combines multiple articles. Each +article uses the \textsf{jmlr} class file. \emph{The articles +should not need to be edited in order to combine them using this +class file.}\footnote{Unless the authors have done something +weird or have used problematic packages.} In particular, you +don't need to delete \verb|\documentclass|, +\verb|\begin{document}| and \verb|\end{document}|. The articles +should be able to compile on their own or as part of this book. + +In the preamble of the book, you need to include the packages +that the articles include, but you don't need to include +any packages that are automatically loaded by the \textsf{jmlr} +class (\textsf{amsmath}, \textsf{amssymb}, \textsf{natbib}, +\textsf{graphicx}, \textsf{url}, \textsf{xcolor} and +\textsf{algorithm2e}). You also don't need to include the +\textsf{hyperref} and \textsf{combnat} packages as they are +automatically loaded by \textsf{jmlrbook}. For example, some of the +articles imported in this book use the \textsf{lipsum} package, +so that package needs to be included in the preamble of the +book. + +Commands defined in the imported articles will be local to that +article unless \verb|\gdef| or \verb|\global| has been used. This +means that if more than one article has defined the same command, +there shouldn't be a conflict unless the command has been defined +globally. For example, \texttt{paper1/paper1.tex} and +\texttt{paper2/paper2.tex} both define \verb|\samplecommand|, but +since \verb|\newcommand| has been used, rather than \verb|\gdef|, +there's no conflict. However, a problem will occur if the same +command is also defined in this document before either of those +files are imported. + +Many packages must be loaded before \textsf{hyperref}. If these +packages haven't been loaded by \textsf{jmlr}, you will need +to specify them using \textsf{jmlrbook}'s \texttt{prehyperref} +option. For example, to load the packages ``foo'' and ``bar'': +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[ + prehyperref={\usepackage{foo}\usepackage{bar}} + ]{jmlrbook} +\end{verbatim} +or: +\begin{verbatim} +\documentclass[ + prehyperref={\usepackage{foo,bar}} + ]{jmlrbook} +\end{verbatim} + + +The imported papers need to be placed inside the +\texttt{jmlrpapers} environment. Papers that have already +been published should be included using \verb|\importpubpaper| +and papers that haven't been published elsewhere should be +imported using \verb|\importarticle|. Both commands have an +optional argument that specifies the prefix to use in the labels +within the imported article. If omitted, the article's file +name is used. + +Both articles and the book may have appendices and parts created. +Parts are created using \verb|\part|\{\emph{title}\}. Switch +to appendices using \verb|\appendix| and then use \verb|\chapter| +(for the book) or \verb|\section| (in imported articles). + +Cross-referencing other parts of the book is done using the +usual \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| mechanism. The \textsf{jmlr} +class additional provides convenience commands such as +\verb|\sectionref| and \verb|\figureref|. Unlike \verb|\ref|, +these commands may take a comma-separated list of labels as the +argument. + +The \textsf{jmlrbook} additionally provides \verb|\chapterref| +(which can take a comma-separated list of labels) and commands +to reference imported articles (which take a single label +as the argument): \verb|\articlepageref| (the starting page of +the article), \verb|\articlepagesref| (the page range for the +article), \verb|\articletitleref| (the short title for the +article) and \verb|\articleauthorref| (the article's author). + +You may also cross-reference parts of the imported articles, +but you need to prefix the label with the label supplied +in the optional argument of \verb|\importpubpaper| or +\verb|\importarticle|. (If omitted, this is given by +directory/file name.) + +For example, the first appendix in this book is +\appendixref{apd:first}, but the first appendix in +``\articletitleref{paper1/paper1}'' by +\articleauthorref{paper1/paper1} +(pp.~\articlepagesref{paper1/paper1}) is +\appendixref{paper1/paper1apd:first}. +Here's a reference to a couple of tables in +\articletitleref{paper1/paper1}: +\tableref{paper1/paper1tab:sample,paper1/paper1tab:sample2}. + +The author of a foreword (or other chapter) can sign off using +the \texttt{authorsignoff} environment. Each author should be +specified using \verb|\Author|. + +\begin{authorsignoff} +\Author{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia} +\end{authorsignoff} + +\chapter{Preface} + +The editorial team can sign off at the end of the preface using +the \texttt{signoff} environment. This has two arguments: the +optional argument is a name for the editorial team (defaults to +``The Editorial Team'') and the mandatory argument is the date. +Within the environment, use \verb|\Editor| for each editor. + +\begin{signoff}{March 2010} +% First editor: +\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia\\ +\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}} +% Second editor: +\Editor{Anne Editor\\ +University of Nowhere\\ +\mailto{ae@sample.com}} +\end{signoff} + +\tableofcontents + +\mainmatter + +\part{First Part of the Book} + +\chapter{Introduction} + +This is an introduction to the book. + +\section{Sample Section} + +This is a section in the introduction. + +\subsection{Sample Sub-Section} + +This is a sub-section. + +\subsubsection{Sample Sub-Sub-Section} + +This is a sub-sub-section. + +\paragraph{Sample Sub-Sub-Sub-Section} + +This is a sub-sub-sub-section. + +\subparagraph{Sample Sub-Sub-Sub-Sub-Section} + +This is a sub-sub-sub-sub-section. + +% Add a part to the TOC but don't print anything +\addtocpart{Papers Published in JMLR W\&CP} + +\begin{jmlrpapers} + % Prepublished papers are imported using: + % \importpubpaper[label]{dir}{file}{pages} + % pages refers to the page range in the original publication + % which doesn't necessarily correspond to the page numbers in + % this book. + \importpubpaper{paper1}{paper1}{23--45} + + \importpubpaper{paper2}{paper2}{63--70} + +\end{jmlrpapers} + +% Add a part to the TOC but don't print anything +\addtocpart{Unpublished Papers} + +\begin{jmlrpapers} + % Unpublished papers are imported using: + % \importarticle[label]{dir}{file} + \importarticle{paper3}{paper3} + + \importarticle{paper4}{paper4} +\end{jmlrpapers} + +\appendix + +\part{First Part of Appendices}\label{pt:apd1} + +\chapter*{Introduction} + +This is an introduction to \partref{pt:apd1}. + +\chapter{First Appendix} +\label{apd:first} + +This is an appendix. + +\chapter{Second Appendix} +\label{apd:second} + +This is another appendix. + +\part{Second Part of Appendices} + +\chapter{An Appendix} +\label{apd:third} + +This is an appendix in another part. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddc24c66628 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.bib @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +@article{guyon-elisseeff-03, + title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection", + author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff", + journal = "JMLR", + volume = "3", + month = MAR, + pages = "1157-1182", + year = 2003 +} + +@techreport{guyon2007causalreport, + author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff}, + title = {Causal Feature Selection}, + institution = {Clopinet}, + year = 2007, + type = {Technical Report }, + source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}} +} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..5d05fff2d55 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper1/paper1.tex @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr} + +\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example + +\newcommand{\samplecommand}{\emph{A sample command}} + +\jmlrvolume{42} +\jmlryear{2010} +\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality} + +\title[Article 1]{First Sample Article} + +\author{\Name{Jane Doe}\Email{jd@sample.com}\and +\Name{John {Smith Jones}}\Email{jsj@sample.com}\\ +\addr{University of No Where}} + +\editor{Anne Editor} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +\lipsum[1] +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +Sample +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} + +This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses +the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting +equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results} +and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}. +\samplecommand. + +\lipsum + +\section{Method}\label{sec:method} + +\lipsum + +\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2} +E = mc^2 +\end{equation} + +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:sample} + {\caption{A Sample Table}} + {% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + A & B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }% +\end{table} + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:sample2} + {\caption{Another Sample Table}} + {% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + A & B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }% +\end{table} + +\lipsum + +Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +\bibliography{paper1} + +\appendix +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +\lipsum +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddc24c66628 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.bib @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +@article{guyon-elisseeff-03, + title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection", + author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff", + journal = "JMLR", + volume = "3", + month = MAR, + pages = "1157-1182", + year = 2003 +} + +@techreport{guyon2007causalreport, + author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff}, + title = {Causal Feature Selection}, + institution = {Clopinet}, + year = 2007, + type = {Technical Report }, + source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}} +} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..01471c1f04a --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper2/paper2.tex @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr} + +\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example + +\newcommand{\samplecommand}{\textbf{A sample command}} + +\jmlrvolume{42} +\jmlryear{2010} +\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality} + +\title[Article 2]{Second Sample Article} + +\author{\Name{Bob {de Winter}}\Email{bdw@sample.com}\\ +\Name{{\'E}louise Mary Finchley}\Email{emf@sample.com}\\ +\Name{Jack Mark Jones}\Email{jmj@sample.com}\\ +\addr{University of No Where}} + +\editor{Anne Other Editor} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +\lipsum[1] +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +Sample +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} + +This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses +the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting +equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results} +and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}. +\samplecommand. + +\lipsum + +\section{Method}\label{sec:method} + +\lipsum + +\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2} +E = mc^2 +\end{equation} + +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} + +\lipsum + +Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +\bibliography{paper2} + +\appendix +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +\lipsum +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddc24c66628 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.bib @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +@article{guyon-elisseeff-03, + title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection", + author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff", + journal = "JMLR", + volume = "3", + month = MAR, + pages = "1157-1182", + year = 2003 +} + +@techreport{guyon2007causalreport, + author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff}, + title = {Causal Feature Selection}, + institution = {Clopinet}, + year = 2007, + type = {Technical Report }, + source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}} +} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..03416f1e9bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper3/paper3.tex @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr} + +\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example + +\title[Article 3]{Third Sample Article} + +\author{\Name{John Smith}\Email{js@sample.com}\\ +\addr{University of No Where}} + +\editor{Anne Editor} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +\lipsum[1] +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +Sample +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} + +This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses +the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting +equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results} +and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}. + +\lipsum + +\section{Method}\label{sec:method} + +\lipsum + +\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2} +E = mc^2 +\end{equation} + +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} + +\lipsum + +Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +\bibliography{paper3} + +\appendix +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +\lipsum +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddc24c66628 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.bib @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +@article{guyon-elisseeff-03, + title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection", + author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff", + journal = "JMLR", + volume = "3", + month = MAR, + pages = "1157-1182", + year = 2003 +} + +@techreport{guyon2007causalreport, + author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff}, + title = {Causal Feature Selection}, + institution = {Clopinet}, + year = 2007, + type = {Technical Report }, + source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}} +} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..06d866e2287 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/paper4/paper4.tex @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr} + +\usepackage{lipsum}% Provides dummy text for this example + +\title[Article 4]{Fourth Sample Article} + +\author{\Name{Mary-Jane {de Beer}}\Email{mjdb@sample.com}\\ +\addr{University of No Where}} + +\editor{Anne Editor} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +\lipsum[1] +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +Sample +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} + +This is a sample article. \sectionref{sec:method} discusses +the method used. \equationref{eq:emc2} is an interesting +equation. The results are discussed in \sectionref{sec:results} +and some other stuff is in \appendixref{apd:first}. + +\lipsum + +\section{Method}\label{sec:method} + +\lipsum + +\begin{equation}\label{eq:emc2} +E = mc^2 +\end{equation} + +\section{Results}\label{sec:results} + +\lipsum + +Here are some citations: \citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +\bibliography{paper4} + +\appendix +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +\lipsum +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..71e6518f453 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-books/proceedings-sample.tex @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlrbook}% on-line color version +%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlrbook}% print version + +\jmlrvolume{42} +\jmlryear{2010} +\jmlrworkshop{Workshop on Causality} + +% Packages used by imported articles: +\usepackage{lipsum} + +% Title is added to the PDF properties. Optional argument +% is used instead, if present. +%\title[Short Title]{Big Long Title} +\title{Sample Proceedings} + +\author[Anne Editor et al.]{Anne Editor, Anne Other Editor and Nicola Talbot} + +\subtitle{\thejmlrworkshop} + +\logo{\includegraphics{bookLogo}} + +\begin{document} +\maketitle + +\frontmatter + +\chapter{Foreword} + +This is the foreword. + +\begin{authorsignoff} +\Author{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia} +\end{authorsignoff} + +\chapter{Preface} + +This is the preface + +\begin{signoff}{March 2010} +% First editor: +\Editor{Nicola Talbot\\ +University of East Anglia\\ +\mailto{N.Talbot@uea.ac.uk}} +% Second editor: +\Editor{Anne Editor\\ +University of Nowhere\\ +\mailto{ae@sample.com}} +\end{signoff} + +\tableofcontents + +\mainmatter + +\begin{jmlrpapers} + \addtocpart{Introduction} + % syntax: \importpaper[label]{directory}{filename} + \importpaper{paper1}{paper1} + \addtocpart{First Topic} + \importpaper{paper2}{paper2} + \importpaper{paper3}{paper3} + \addtocpart{Second Topic} + \importpaper{paper4}{paper4} +\end{jmlrpapers} + + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e6366465387 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle-gray.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..365deb2e1f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/circle.jpg diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e4af05acda2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes-gray.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..a4e79c25064 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/nodes.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..b150e663542 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square-gray.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 00000000000..8844e858166 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/square.png diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..9fdc0d13827 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/images/teximage.tex @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +\frame{\begin{picture}(100,100) +\put(25,50){\dashbox{.5}(10,10){$A$}} +\put(50,50){\dashbox{.5}(10,10){$B$}} +\end{picture}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..ddc24c66628 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.bib @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +@article{guyon-elisseeff-03, + title = "An Introduction to Variable and Feature Selection", + author = "I. Guyon and A. Elisseeff", + journal = "JMLR", + volume = "3", + month = MAR, + pages = "1157-1182", + year = 2003 +} + +@techreport{guyon2007causalreport, + author = {I. Guyon and C. Aliferis and A. Elisseeff}, + title = {Causal Feature Selection}, + institution = {Clopinet}, + year = 2007, + type = {Technical Report }, + source = {\url{http://clopinet.com/isabelle/Papers/causalFS.pdf}} +} + diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..7668ec816b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlr-sample.tex @@ -0,0 +1,752 @@ +%\documentclass[gray]{jmlr} % test grayscale version +\documentclass{jmlr} + +% The following packages will be automatically loaded: +% amsmath, amssymb, natbib, graphicx, url, algorithm2e + +%\usepackage{rotating}% for sideways figures and tables +%\usepackage{longtable}% for long tables + +% The booktabs package is used by this sample document +% (it provides \toprule, \midrule and \bottomrule). +% Remove the next line if you don't require it. +\usepackage{booktabs} +% The siunitx package is used by this sample document +% to align numbers in a column by their decimal point. +% Remove the next line if you don't require it. +\usepackage{siunitx} + +% The following command is just for this sample document: +\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} + +\jmlrvolume{vol} +\jmlryear{2010} +\jmlrsubmitted{submission date} +\jmlrpublished{publication date} + +\title[Short Title]{Full Title of Article} + + % Use \Name{Author Name} to specify the name. + % If the surname contains spaces, enclose the surname + % in braces, e.g. \Name{John {Smith Jones}} similarly + % if the name has a "von" part, e.g \Name{Jane {de Winter}}. + % If the first letter in the forenames is a diacritic + % enclose the diacritic in braces, e.g. \Name{{\'E}louise Smith} + + % Two authors with the same address + \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and + \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address} + + % Three or more authors with the same address: + % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name3} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name4} \Email{an4@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name5} \Email{an5@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name6} \Email{an6@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name7} \Email{an7@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name8} \Email{an8@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name9} \Email{an9@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name10} \Email{an10@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name11} \Email{an11@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name12} \Email{an12@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name13} \Email{an13@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name14} \Email{an14@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address} + + + % Authors with different addresses: + % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address 1 + % \AND + % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address 2 + %} + +\editor{Editor's name} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +This is the abstract for this article. +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +List of keywords +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} + +This is a sample article that uses the \textsf{jmlr} class with +the \texttt{wcp} class option. Please follow the guidelines in +this sample document as it can help to reduce complications when +combining the articles into a book. Please avoid using obsolete +commands, such as \verb|\rm|, and obsolete packages, such as +\textsf{epsfig}.\footnote{See +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/l2tabu}} Please also ensure +that your document will compile with PDF\LaTeX. + +\subsection{Sub-sections} + +Sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsection|. + +\subsubsection{Sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsubsection|. + +\paragraph{Sub-sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\paragraph|. +These are unnumbered with a running head. + +\subparagraph{Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subparagraph|. +These are unnumbered with a running head. + +\section{Cross-Referencing} + +Always use \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| (or one of the commands +described below) when cross-referencing. For example, the next +section is Section~\ref{sec:math}. The \textsf{jmlr} class +provides some convenient cross-referencing commands: +\verb|\sectionref|, \verb|\equationref|, \verb|\tableref|, +\verb|\figureref|, \verb|\algorithmref|, \verb|\theoremref|, +\verb|\lemmaref|, \verb|\remarkref|, \verb|\corollaryref|, +\verb|\definitionref|, \verb|\conjectureref|, \verb|\axiomref|, +\verb|\exampleref| and \verb|\appendixref|. The argument of these +commands may either be a single label or a comma-separated list +of labels. Examples: + +Referencing sections: \sectionref{sec:math} or +\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math} or +\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math,sec:tables,sec:figures}. + +Referencing equations: \equationref{eq:trigrule} or +\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:df} or +\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:f,eq:df,eq:y}. + +Referencing tables: \tableref{tab:operatornames} or +\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example} or +\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example,tab:example-booktabs}. + +Referencing figures: \figureref{fig:nodes} or +\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage} or +\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage,fig:subfigex} or +\figureref{fig:circle,fig:square}. + +Referencing algorithms: \algorithmref{alg:gauss} or +\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore} or +\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore,alg:net}. + +Referencing theorem-like environments: \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}, +\lemmaref{lem:sample}, \remarkref{rem:sample}, +\corollaryref{cor:sample}, \definitionref{def:sample}, +\conjectureref{con:sample}, \axiomref{ax:sample} and +\exampleref{ex:sample}. + +Referencing appendices: \appendixref{apd:first} or +\appendixref{apd:first,apd:second}. + +\section{Equations} +\label{sec:math} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{amsmath} package, so +you can use any of the commands and environments defined there. +(See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further +details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc amsmath} or +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath}}) + +Unnumbered single-lined equations should be displayed using +\verb|\[| and \verb|\]|. For example: +\[E = m c^2\] +Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{equation} environment. For example: +\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule} +\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1 +\end{equation} +This can be referenced using \verb|\label| and \verb|\equationref|. +For example, \equationref{eq:trigrule}. + +Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{align} environment. For example: +\begin{align} +f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\ +f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df} +\end{align} +Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{align*} environment. For example: +\begin{align*} +f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\ +&= x^2 - 1 +\end{align*} +If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the +align environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with +\verb|\nonumber|. For example: +\begin{align} +y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\ +&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y} +\end{align} +An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be +displayed using the \texttt{split} environment. +Text can be embedded in an equation using \verb|\text| or +\verb|\intertext| (as used in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}). +See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further details. + +\subsection{Operator Names} +\label{sec:op} + +Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}. +For additional operators, either use \verb|\operatorname|, +for example $\operatorname{var}(X)$ or declare it with +\verb|\DeclareMathOperator|, for example +\begin{verbatim} +\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var} +\end{verbatim} +and then use this new command. If you want limits that go above and +below the operator (like \verb|\sum|) use the starred versions +(\verb|\operatorname*| or \verb|\DeclareMathOperator*|). + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:operatornames}% + {\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from + \textsf{amsmath} documentation)}}% + {% +\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl} +\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\ +\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\ +\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\ +\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\ +\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\ +\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\ +\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\ +\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\ +\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$ +\end{tabular}\par +\begin{tabular}{rlrl} +\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$ +& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\ +\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$ +& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$ +\end{tabular} +} +\end{table} + +\section{Vectors and Sets} +\label{sec:vec} + +Vectors should be typeset using \cs{vec}. For example $\vec{x}$. +The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides \cs{set} to typeset a +set. For example $\set{S}$. + +\section{Floats} +\label{sec:floats} + +Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving +objects and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient +location. Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In +general it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't +put the figure or table in the middle of a paragraph (that is +make sure there's a paragraph break above and below the float). +Floats are supposed to have a little extra space above and below +them to make them stand out from the rest of the text. This extra +spacing is put in automatically and shouldn't need modifying. + +To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the format of the caption by doing +something like: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}} +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\em A Sample Caption.} +\end{verbatim} +You can, of course, change the font for individual words or +phrases, for example: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Tables} +\label{sec:tables} + +Tables should go in the \texttt{table} environment. Within this +environment use \verb|\floatconts| (defined by \textsf{jmlr}) +to set the caption correctly and center the table contents. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +% The first argument is the label. +% The caption goes in the second argument, and the table contents +% go in the third argument. +\floatconts + {tab:example}% + {\caption{An Example Table}}% + {\begin{tabular}{ll} + \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + Data4 & 0.09876 + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If you want horizontal rules you can use the \textsf{booktabs} +package which provides the commands \verb|\toprule|, +\verb|\midrule| and \verb|\bottomrule|. For example, see +\tableref{tab:example-booktabs}. + +\begin{table}[hbtp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-booktabs} + {\caption{A Table With Horizontal Lines}} + {\begin{tabular}{ll} + \toprule + \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + \midrule + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + Data4 & 0.09876\\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If you want vertical lines as well, you can't use the +\textsf{booktabs} commands as there'll be some unwanted gaps. +Instead you can use \LaTeX's \verb|\hline|, but the rows may +appear a bit cramped. You can add extra space above or below a +row using \verb|\abovestrut| and \verb|\belowstrut|. For example, +see \tableref{tab:example-hline}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-hline} + {\caption{A Table With Horizontal and Vertical Lines}}% + {% + \begin{tabular}{|l|l|} + \hline + \abovestrut{2.2ex}\bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\\hline + \abovestrut{2.2ex}Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + \belowstrut{0.2ex}Data4 & 0.09876\\\hline + \end{tabular} + } +\end{table} + +If you want to align numbers on their decimal point, you can +use the \textsf{siunitx} package. For example, see +\tableref{tab:example-siunitx}. For further details see the +\textsf{siunitx} documentation\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc +siunitx} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/siunitx}}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-siunitx} + {\caption{A Table With Numbers Aligned on the Decimal Point}} + {\begin{tabular}{lS[tabformat=3.5]} + \bfseries Dataset & {\bfseries Result}\\ + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 10.6789\\ + Data3 & 50.543\\ + Data4 & 200.09876 + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If the table is too wide, you can adjust the inter-column +spacing by changing the value of \verb|\tabcolsep|. For +example: +\begin{verbatim} +\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt} +\end{verbatim} +If the table is very wide but not very long, you can use the +\texttt{sidewaystable} environment defined in the +\textsf{rotating} package (so use \verb|\usepackage{rotating}|). +If the table is too long to fit on a page, you should use the +\texttt{longtable} environment defined in the \textsf{longtable} +package (so use \verb|\usepackage{longtable}|). + +\subsection{Figures} +\label{sec:figures} + +Figures should go in the \texttt{figure} environment. Within this +environment, use \verb|\floatconts| to correctly position the +caption and center the image. Use \verb|\includegraphics| +for external graphics files but omit the file extension. Do not +use \verb|\epsfig| or \verb|\psfig|. If you want to scale the +image, it's better to use a fraction of the line width rather +than an explicit length. For example, see \figureref{fig:nodes}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +% Caption and label go in the first argument and the figure contents +% go in the second argument +\floatconts + {fig:nodes} + {\caption{Example Image}} + {\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{images/nodes}} +\end{figure} + +If your image is made up of \LaTeX\ code (for example, commands +provided by the \textsf{pgf} package) you can include it using +\cs{includeteximage} (defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class). This +can be scaled and rotated in the same way as \cs{includegraphics}. +For example, see \figureref{fig:teximage}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:teximage} + {\caption{Image Created Using \LaTeX\ Code}} + {\includeteximage[angle=45]{images/teximage}} +\end{figure} + +If the figure is too wide to fit on the page, you can use the +\texttt{sidewaysfigure} environment defined in the +\textsf{rotating} package. + +Don't use \verb|\graphicspath|. If the images are contained in +a subdirectory, specify this when you include the image, for +example \verb|\includegraphics{figures/mypic}|. + +\subsubsection{Sub-Figures} +\label{sec:subfigures} + +Sub-figures can be created using \verb|\subfigure|, which is +defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class. The optional argument allows +you to provide a subcaption. The label should be placed in the +mandatory argument of \verb|\subfigure|. You can reference the +entire figure, for example \figureref{fig:subfigex}, or you can +reference part of the figure using \verb|\figureref|, for example +\figureref{fig:circle}. Alternatively you can reference the +subfigure using \verb|\subfigref|, for example +\subfigref{fig:circle,fig:square} in \figureref{fig:subfigex}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:subfigex} + {\caption{An Example With Sub-Figures.}} + {% + \subfigure[A Circle]{\label{fig:circle}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/circle}}% + \qquad + \subfigure[A Square]{\label{fig:square}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}} + } +\end{figure} + +By default, the sub-figures are aligned on the baseline. +This can be changed using the second optional argument +of \verb|\subfigure|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} +(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the subfigures +\subfigref{fig:circle2,fig:square2} in \figureref{fig:subfigex2} +both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:subfigex2} + {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Figures.}} + {% + \subfigure[A Small Circle][c]{\label{fig:circle2}% + \includegraphics[width=0.1\linewidth]{images/circle}}% + \qquad + \subfigure[A Square][c]{\label{fig:square2}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}} + } +\end{figure} + +\subsection{Sub-Tables} +\label{sec:subtables} +There is an analogous command \verb|\subtable| for sub-tables. +It has the same syntax as \verb|\subfigure| described above. +You can reference the table using \verb|\tableref|, for example +\tableref{tab:subtabex} or you can reference part of the table, +for example \tableref{tab:ab}. Alternatively you can reference the +subtable using \verb|\subtabref|, for example +\subtabref{tab:ab,tab:cd} in \tableref{tab:subtabex}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:subtabex} + {\caption{An Example With Sub-Tables}} + {% + \subtable{% + \label{tab:ab}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }\qquad + \subtable{% + \label{tab:cd}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\ + 3 & 4\\ + 5 & 6 + \end{tabular} + } + } +\end{table} + +By default, the sub-tables are aligned on the top. +This can be changed using the second optional argument +of \verb|\subtable|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} +(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the sub-tables +\subtabref{tab:ab2,tab:cd2} in \tableref{tab:subtabex2} +both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:subtabex2} + {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Tables}} + {% + \subtable[][c]{% + \label{tab:ab2}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }\qquad + \subtable[][c]{% + \label{tab:cd2}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\ + 3 & 4\\ + 5 & 6 + \end{tabular} + } + } +\end{table} + +\subsection{Algorithms} +\label{sec:algorithms} + +Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the +\texttt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use +\verb|\caption| to set the caption and you can use an +\texttt{enumerate} or nested \texttt{enumerate} environments. +For example, see \algorithmref{alg:gauss}. Note that algorithms +float like figures and tables. + +\begin{algorithm}[htbp] +\caption{The Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\label{alg:gauss} +\begin{enumerate} + \item For $k=1$ to maximum number of iterations + \begin{enumerate} + \item For $i=1$ to $n$ + \begin{enumerate} + \item $x_i^{(k)} = + \frac{b_i - \sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)} + - \sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}{a_{ii}}$ + \item If $\|\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)} < \epsilon\|$, + where $\epsilon$ is a specified stopping criteria, stop. + \end{enumerate} + \end{enumerate} +\end{enumerate} +\end{algorithm} + +If you'd rather have the same numbering throughout the algorithm +but still want the convenient indentation of nested +\texttt{enumerate} environments, you can use the +\texttt{enumerate*} environment provided by the \textsf{jmlr} +class. For example, see \algorithmref{alg:moore}. + +\begin{algorithm} +\caption{Moore's Shortest Path}\label{alg:moore} +Given a connected graph $G$, where the length of each edge is 1: +\begin{enumerate*} + \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0 + \item Set $i=0$ + \begin{enumerate*} + \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices + adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$ + \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled, + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and + the length is given by the label of $t$. + \end{enumerate*} + otherwise + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate} + \end{enumerate*} + \end{enumerate*} +\end{enumerate*} +\end{algorithm} + +Pseudo code can be displayed using the \texttt{algorithm2e} +environment. This is defined by the \textsf{algorithm2e} package +(which is automatically loaded) so check the \textsf{algorithm2e} +documentation for further details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc +algorithm2e} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e}} +For an example, see \algorithmref{alg:net}. + +\begin{algorithm2e} +\caption{Computing Net Activation} +\label{alg:net} +\dontprintsemicolon +\linesnumbered +\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$} +\KwOut{$y$, the net activation} +$y\leftarrow 0$\; +\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{ + $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\; +} +\end{algorithm2e} + +\section{Description Lists} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides a description-like +environment called \texttt{altdescription}. This has an +argument that should be the widest label in the list. Compare: +\begin{description} +\item[add] A method that adds two variables. +\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. +\end{description} +with +\begin{altdescription}{differentiate} +\item[add] A method that adds two variables. +\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. +\end{altdescription} + +\section{Theorems, Lemmas etc} +\label{sec:theorems} + +The following theorem-like environments are predefined by +the \textsf{jmlr} class: \texttt{theorem}, \texttt{example}, +\texttt{lemma}, \texttt{proposition}, \texttt{remark}, +\texttt{corollary}, \texttt{definition}, \texttt{conjecture} +and \texttt{axiom}. You can use the \texttt{proof} environment +to display the proof if need be, as in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}. + +\begin{theorem}[Eigenvalue Powers]\label{thm:eigenpow} +If $\lambda$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector +$\vec{\xi}$, then $\lambda^n$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}^n$ +with eigenvector $\vec{\xi}$. +\begin{proof} +Let $\lambda$ be an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector +$\xi$, then +\begin{align*} +\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{\xi} +\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:} +\vec{B}\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +\Rightarrow \vec{B}^2\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad +\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^2\vec{\xi} +\end{align*} +Therefore true for $n=2$. Now assume true for $n=k$: +\begin{align*} +\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{\xi} +\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:} +\vec{B}\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda^k\vec{\xi}\\ +\Rightarrow \vec{B}^{k+1}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^k\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad +\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^{k+1}\vec{\xi} +\end{align*} +Therefore true for $n=k+1$. Therefore, by induction, true for all +$n$. +\end{proof} +\end{theorem} + +\begin{lemma}[A Sample Lemma]\label{lem:sample} +This is a lemma. +\end{lemma} + +\begin{remark}[A Sample Remark]\label{rem:sample} +This is a remark. +\end{remark} + +\begin{corollary}[A Sample Corollary]\label{cor:sample} +This is a corollary. +\end{corollary} + +\begin{definition}[A Sample Definition]\label{def:sample} +This is a definition. +\end{definition} + +\begin{conjecture}[A Sample Conjecture]\label{con:sample} +This is a conjecture. +\end{conjecture} + +\begin{axiom}[A Sample Axiom]\label{ax:sample} +This is an axiom. +\end{axiom} + +\begin{example}[An Example]\label{ex:sample} +This is an example. +\end{example} + +\section{Color vs Grayscale} +\label{sec:color} + +It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their +images in the event that the article is to be incorporated into +a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG +graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the +file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png}, +then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or +\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't +need to modify your code. The \textsf{jmlr} class checks for +the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode +(provided you have used \verb|\includegraphics| and haven't +specified the file extension). + +You can use \verb|\ifprint| to determine which mode you are in. +For example, in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the +\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} ellipse represents an input and the +\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse represents an output. +Another example: {\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!} + +You can use the class option \texttt{gray} to see how the +document will appear in gray scale mode. \textcolor{blue}{Colored +text} will automatically be converted to gray scale. + +The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{xcolor} +package, so you can also define your own colors. For example: +\ifprint + {\definecolor{myred}{gray}{0.5}}% + {\definecolor{myred}{rgb}{0.5,0,0}}% +\textcolor{myred}{XYZ}. + +The \textsf{xcolor} class is loaded with the \texttt{x11names} +option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed +in the \textsf{xcolor} documentation\footnote{either +\texttt{texdoc xcolor} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}}). + +\section{Citations and Bibliography} +\label{sec:cite} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class automatically loads \textsf{natbib}. +This sample file has the citations defined in the accompanying +BibTeX file \texttt{jmlr-sample.bib}. For a parenthetical +citation use \verb|\citep|. For example +\citep{guyon-elisseeff-03}. For a textual citation use +\verb|\citet|. For example \citet{guyon2007causalreport}. +Both commands may take a comma-separated list, for example +\citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +These commands have optional arguments and have a starred +version. See the \textsf{natbib} documentation for further +details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc natbib} or +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}} + +The bibliography is displayed using \verb|\bibliography|. + +\acks{Acknowledgements go here.} + +\bibliography{jmlr-sample} + +\appendix + +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +This is the first appendix. + +\section{Second Appendix}\label{apd:second} + +This is the second appendix. + +\end{document} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..107d12061c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/jmlr/sample-papers/jmlrwcp-sample.tex @@ -0,0 +1,752 @@ +%\documentclass[wcp,gray]{jmlr} % test grayscale version +\documentclass[wcp]{jmlr} + +% The following packages will be automatically loaded: +% amsmath, amssymb, natbib, graphicx, url, algorithm2e + +%\usepackage{rotating}% for sideways figures and tables +\usepackage{longtable}% for long tables + +% The booktabs package is used by this sample document +% (it provides \toprule, \midrule and \bottomrule). +% Remove the next line if you don't require it. +\usepackage{booktabs} +% The siunitx package is used by this sample document +% to align numbers in a column by their decimal point. +% Remove the next line if you don't require it. +\usepackage{siunitx} + +% The following command is just for this sample document: +\newcommand{\cs}[1]{\texttt{\char`\\#1}} + +\jmlrvolume{vol} +\jmlryear{2010} +\jmlrworkshop{Workshop Title} + +\title[Short Title]{Full Title of Article} + + % Use \Name{Author Name} to specify the name. + % If the surname contains spaces, enclose the surname + % in braces, e.g. \Name{John {Smith Jones}} similarly + % if the name has a "von" part, e.g \Name{Jane {de Winter}}. + % If the first letter in the forenames is a diacritic + % enclose the diacritic in braces, e.g. \Name{{\'E}louise Smith} + + % Two authors with the same address + \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\and + \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + \addr Address} + + % Three or more authors with the same address: + % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{an1@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{an2@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name3} \Email{an3@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name4} \Email{an4@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name5} \Email{an5@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name6} \Email{an6@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name7} \Email{an7@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name8} \Email{an8@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name9} \Email{an9@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name10} \Email{an10@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name11} \Email{an11@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name12} \Email{an12@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name13} \Email{an13@sample.com}\\ + % \Name{Author Name14} \Email{an14@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address} + + + % Authors with different addresses: + % \author{\Name{Author Name1} \Email{abc@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address 1 + % \AND + % \Name{Author Name2} \Email{xyz@sample.com}\\ + % \addr Address 2 + %} + +\editor{Editor's name} +% \editors{List of editors' names} + +\begin{document} + +\maketitle + +\begin{abstract} +This is the abstract for this article. +\end{abstract} +\begin{keywords} +List of keywords +\end{keywords} + +\section{Introduction} +\label{sec:intro} + +This is a sample article that uses the \textsf{jmlr} class with +the \texttt{wcp} class option. Please follow the guidelines in +this sample document as it can help to reduce complications when +combining the articles into a book. Please avoid using obsolete +commands, such as \verb|\rm|, and obsolete packages, such as +\textsf{epsfig}.\footnote{See +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/l2tabu}} Please also ensure +that your document will compile with PDF\LaTeX. + +\subsection{Sub-sections} + +Sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsection|. + +\subsubsection{Sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subsubsection|. + +\paragraph{Sub-sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\paragraph|. +These are unnumbered with a running head. + +\subparagraph{Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections} + +Sub-sub-sub-sub-sections are produced using \verb|\subparagraph|. +These are unnumbered with a running head. + +\section{Cross-Referencing} + +Always use \verb|\label| and \verb|\ref| (or one of the commands +described below) when cross-referencing. For example, the next +section is Section~\ref{sec:math}. The \textsf{jmlr} class +provides some convenient cross-referencing commands: +\verb|\sectionref|, \verb|\equationref|, \verb|\tableref|, +\verb|\figureref|, \verb|\algorithmref|, \verb|\theoremref|, +\verb|\lemmaref|, \verb|\remarkref|, \verb|\corollaryref|, +\verb|\definitionref|, \verb|\conjectureref|, \verb|\axiomref|, +\verb|\exampleref| and \verb|\appendixref|. The argument of these +commands may either be a single label or a comma-separated list +of labels. Examples: + +Referencing sections: \sectionref{sec:math} or +\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math} or +\sectionref{sec:intro,sec:math,sec:tables,sec:figures}. + +Referencing equations: \equationref{eq:trigrule} or +\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:df} or +\equationref{eq:trigrule,eq:f,eq:df,eq:y}. + +Referencing tables: \tableref{tab:operatornames} or +\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example} or +\tableref{tab:operatornames,tab:example,tab:example-booktabs}. + +Referencing figures: \figureref{fig:nodes} or +\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage} or +\figureref{fig:nodes,fig:teximage,fig:subfigex} or +\figureref{fig:circle,fig:square}. + +Referencing algorithms: \algorithmref{alg:gauss} or +\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore} or +\algorithmref{alg:gauss,alg:moore,alg:net}. + +Referencing theorem-like environments: \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}, +\lemmaref{lem:sample}, \remarkref{rem:sample}, +\corollaryref{cor:sample}, \definitionref{def:sample}, +\conjectureref{con:sample}, \axiomref{ax:sample} and +\exampleref{ex:sample}. + +Referencing appendices: \appendixref{apd:first} or +\appendixref{apd:first,apd:second}. + +\section{Equations} +\label{sec:math} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{amsmath} package, so +you can use any of the commands and environments defined there. +(See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further +details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc amsmath} or +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/amsmath}}) + +Unnumbered single-lined equations should be displayed using +\verb|\[| and \verb|\]|. For example: +\[E = m c^2\] +Numbered single-line equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{equation} environment. For example: +\begin{equation}\label{eq:trigrule} +\cos^2\theta + \sin^2\theta \equiv 1 +\end{equation} +This can be referenced using \verb|\label| and \verb|\equationref|. +For example, \equationref{eq:trigrule}. + +Multi-lined numbered equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{align} environment. For example: +\begin{align} +f(x) &= x^2 + x\label{eq:f}\\ +f'(x) &= 2x + 1\label{eq:df} +\end{align} +Unnumbered multi-lined equations should be displayed using the +\texttt{align*} environment. For example: +\begin{align*} +f(x) &= (x+1)(x-1)\\ +&= x^2 - 1 +\end{align*} +If you want to mix numbered with unnumbered lines use the +align environment and suppress unwanted line numbers with +\verb|\nonumber|. For example: +\begin{align} +y &= x^2 + 3x - 2x + 1\nonumber\\ +&= x^2 + x + 1\label{eq:y} +\end{align} +An equation that is too long to fit on a single line can be +displayed using the \texttt{split} environment. +Text can be embedded in an equation using \verb|\text| or +\verb|\intertext| (as used in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}). +See the \textsf{amsmath} documentation for further details. + +\subsection{Operator Names} +\label{sec:op} + +Predefined operator names are listed in \tableref{tab:operatornames}. +For additional operators, either use \verb|\operatorname|, +for example $\operatorname{var}(X)$ or declare it with +\verb|\DeclareMathOperator|, for example +\begin{verbatim} +\DeclareMathOperator{\var}{var} +\end{verbatim} +and then use this new command. If you want limits that go above and +below the operator (like \verb|\sum|) use the starred versions +(\verb|\operatorname*| or \verb|\DeclareMathOperator*|). + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:operatornames}% + {\caption{Predefined Operator Names (taken from + \textsf{amsmath} documentation)}}% + {% +\begin{tabular}{rlrlrlrl} +\cs{arccos} & $\arccos$ & \cs{deg} & $\deg$ & \cs{lg} & $\lg$ & \cs{projlim} & $\projlim$ \\ +\cs{arcsin} & $\arcsin$ & \cs{det} & $\det$ & \cs{lim} & $\lim$ & \cs{sec} & $\sec$ \\ +\cs{arctan} & $\arctan$ & \cs{dim} & $\dim$ & \cs{liminf} & $\liminf$ & \cs{sin} & $\sin$ \\ +\cs{arg} & $\arg$ & \cs{exp} & $\exp$ & \cs{limsup} & $\limsup$ & \cs{sinh} & $\sinh$ \\ +\cs{cos} & $\cos$ & \cs{gcd} & $\gcd$ & \cs{ln} & $\ln$ & \cs{sup} & $\sup$ \\ +\cs{cosh} & $\cosh$ & \cs{hom} & $\hom$ & \cs{log} & $\log$ & \cs{tan} & $\tan$ \\ +\cs{cot} & $\cot$ & \cs{inf} & $\inf$ & \cs{max} & $\max$ & \cs{tanh} & $\tanh$ \\ +\cs{coth} & $\coth$ & \cs{injlim} & $\injlim$ & \cs{min} & $\min$ \\ +\cs{csc} & $\csc$ & \cs{ker} & $\ker$ & \cs{Pr} & $\Pr$ +\end{tabular}\par +\begin{tabular}{rlrl} +\cs{varlimsup} & $\varlimsup$ +& \cs{varinjlim} & $\varinjlim$\\ +\cs{varliminf} & $\varliminf$ +& \cs{varprojlim} & $\varprojlim$ +\end{tabular} +} +\end{table} + +\section{Vectors and Sets} +\label{sec:vec} + +Vectors should be typeset using \cs{vec}. For example $\vec{x}$. +The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides \cs{set} to typeset a +set. For example $\set{S}$. + +\section{Floats} +\label{sec:floats} + +Floats, such as figures, tables and algorithms, are moving +objects and are supposed to float to the nearest convenient +location. Please don't force them to go in a particular place. In +general it's best to use the \texttt{htbp} specifier and don't +put the figure or table in the middle of a paragraph (that is +make sure there's a paragraph break above and below the float). +Floats are supposed to have a little extra space above and below +them to make them stand out from the rest of the text. This extra +spacing is put in automatically and shouldn't need modifying. + +To ensure consistency, please \emph{don't} try changing the format of the caption by doing +something like: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\textit{A Sample Caption.}} +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{\em A Sample Caption.} +\end{verbatim} +You can, of course, change the font for individual words or +phrases, for example: +\begin{verbatim} +\caption{A Sample Caption With Some \emph{Emphasized Words}.} +\end{verbatim} + +\subsection{Tables} +\label{sec:tables} + +Tables should go in the \texttt{table} environment. Within this +environment use \verb|\floatconts| (defined by \textsf{jmlr}) +to set the caption correctly and center the table contents. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +% The first argument is the label. +% The caption goes in the second argument, and the table contents +% go in the third argument. +\floatconts + {tab:example}% + {\caption{An Example Table}}% + {\begin{tabular}{ll} + \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + Data4 & 0.09876 + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If you want horizontal rules you can use the \textsf{booktabs} +package which provides the commands \verb|\toprule|, +\verb|\midrule| and \verb|\bottomrule|. For example, see +\tableref{tab:example-booktabs}. + +\begin{table}[hbtp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-booktabs} + {\caption{A Table With Horizontal Lines}} + {\begin{tabular}{ll} + \toprule + \bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\ + \midrule + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + Data4 & 0.09876\\ + \bottomrule + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If you want vertical lines as well, you can't use the +\textsf{booktabs} commands as there'll be some unwanted gaps. +Instead you can use \LaTeX's \verb|\hline|, but the rows may +appear a bit cramped. You can add extra space above or below a +row using \verb|\abovestrut| and \verb|\belowstrut|. For example, +see \tableref{tab:example-hline}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-hline} + {\caption{A Table With Horizontal and Vertical Lines}}% + {% + \begin{tabular}{|l|l|} + \hline + \abovestrut{2.2ex}\bfseries Dataset & \bfseries Result\\\hline + \abovestrut{2.2ex}Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 0.67890\\ + Data3 & 0.54321\\ + \belowstrut{0.2ex}Data4 & 0.09876\\\hline + \end{tabular} + } +\end{table} + +If you want to align numbers on their decimal point, you can +use the \textsf{siunitx} package. For example, see +\tableref{tab:example-siunitx}. For further details see the +\textsf{siunitx} documentation\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc +siunitx} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/siunitx}}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:example-siunitx} + {\caption{A Table With Numbers Aligned on the Decimal Point}} + {\begin{tabular}{lS[tabformat=3.5]} + \bfseries Dataset & {\bfseries Result}\\ + Data1 & 0.12345\\ + Data2 & 10.6789\\ + Data3 & 50.543\\ + Data4 & 200.09876 + \end{tabular}} +\end{table} + +If the table is too wide, you can adjust the inter-column +spacing by changing the value of \verb|\tabcolsep|. For +example: +\begin{verbatim} +\setlength{\tabcolsep}{3pt} +\end{verbatim} +If the table is very wide but not very long, you can use the +\texttt{sidewaystable} environment defined in the +\textsf{rotating} package (so use \verb|\usepackage{rotating}|). +If the table is too long to fit on a page, you should use the +\texttt{longtable} environment defined in the \textsf{longtable} +package (so use \verb|\usepackage{longtable}|). + +\subsection{Figures} +\label{sec:figures} + +Figures should go in the \texttt{figure} environment. Within this +environment, use \verb|\floatconts| to correctly position the +caption and center the image. Use \verb|\includegraphics| +for external graphics files but omit the file extension. Do not +use \verb|\epsfig| or \verb|\psfig|. If you want to scale the +image, it's better to use a fraction of the line width rather +than an explicit length. For example, see \figureref{fig:nodes}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +% Caption and label go in the first argument and the figure contents +% go in the second argument +\floatconts + {fig:nodes} + {\caption{Example Image}} + {\includegraphics[width=0.5\linewidth]{images/nodes}} +\end{figure} + +If your image is made up of \LaTeX\ code (for example, commands +provided by the \textsf{pgf} package) you can include it using +\cs{includeteximage} (defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class). This +can be scaled and rotated in the same way as \cs{includegraphics}. +For example, see \figureref{fig:teximage}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:teximage} + {\caption{Image Created Using \LaTeX\ Code}} + {\includeteximage[angle=45]{images/teximage}} +\end{figure} + +If the figure is too wide to fit on the page, you can use the +\texttt{sidewaysfigure} environment defined in the +\textsf{rotating} package. + +Don't use \verb|\graphicspath|. If the images are contained in +a subdirectory, specify this when you include the image, for +example \verb|\includegraphics{figures/mypic}|. + +\subsubsection{Sub-Figures} +\label{sec:subfigures} + +Sub-figures can be created using \verb|\subfigure|, which is +defined by the \textsf{jmlr} class. The optional argument allows +you to provide a subcaption. The label should be placed in the +mandatory argument of \verb|\subfigure|. You can reference the +entire figure, for example \figureref{fig:subfigex}, or you can +reference part of the figure using \verb|\figureref|, for example +\figureref{fig:circle}. Alternatively you can reference the +subfigure using \verb|\subfigref|, for example +\subfigref{fig:circle,fig:square} in \figureref{fig:subfigex}. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:subfigex} + {\caption{An Example With Sub-Figures.}} + {% + \subfigure[A Circle]{\label{fig:circle}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/circle}}% + \qquad + \subfigure[A Square]{\label{fig:square}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}} + } +\end{figure} + +By default, the sub-figures are aligned on the baseline. +This can be changed using the second optional argument +of \verb|\subfigure|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} +(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the subfigures +\subfigref{fig:circle2,fig:square2} in \figureref{fig:subfigex2} +both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument. + +\begin{figure}[htbp] +\floatconts + {fig:subfigex2} + {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Figures.}} + {% + \subfigure[A Small Circle][c]{\label{fig:circle2}% + \includegraphics[width=0.1\linewidth]{images/circle}}% + \qquad + \subfigure[A Square][c]{\label{fig:square2}% + \includegraphics[width=0.2\linewidth]{images/square}} + } +\end{figure} + +\subsection{Sub-Tables} +\label{sec:subtables} +There is an analogous command \verb|\subtable| for sub-tables. +It has the same syntax as \verb|\subfigure| described above. +You can reference the table using \verb|\tableref|, for example +\tableref{tab:subtabex} or you can reference part of the table, +for example \tableref{tab:ab}. Alternatively you can reference the +subtable using \verb|\subtabref|, for example +\subtabref{tab:ab,tab:cd} in \tableref{tab:subtabex}. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:subtabex} + {\caption{An Example With Sub-Tables}} + {% + \subtable{% + \label{tab:ab}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }\qquad + \subtable{% + \label{tab:cd}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\ + 3 & 4\\ + 5 & 6 + \end{tabular} + } + } +\end{table} + +By default, the sub-tables are aligned on the top. +This can be changed using the second optional argument +of \verb|\subtable|. This may be \texttt{t} (top), \texttt{c} +(centered) or \texttt{b} (bottom). For example, the sub-tables +\subtabref{tab:ab2,tab:cd2} in \tableref{tab:subtabex2} +both have \verb|[c]| as the second optional argument. + +\begin{table}[htbp] +\floatconts + {tab:subtabex2} + {\caption{Another Example With Sub-Tables}} + {% + \subtable[][c]{% + \label{tab:ab2}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries A & \bfseries B\\ + 1 & 2 + \end{tabular} + }\qquad + \subtable[][c]{% + \label{tab:cd2}% + \begin{tabular}{cc} + \bfseries C & \bfseries D\\ + 3 & 4\\ + 5 & 6 + \end{tabular} + } + } +\end{table} + +\subsection{Algorithms} +\label{sec:algorithms} + +Enumerated textual algorithms can be displayed using the +\texttt{algorithm} environment. Within this environment, use +\verb|\caption| to set the caption and you can use an +\texttt{enumerate} or nested \texttt{enumerate} environments. +For example, see \algorithmref{alg:gauss}. Note that algorithms +float like figures and tables. + +\begin{algorithm}[htbp] +\caption{The Gauss-Seidel Algorithm}\label{alg:gauss} +\begin{enumerate} + \item For $k=1$ to maximum number of iterations + \begin{enumerate} + \item For $i=1$ to $n$ + \begin{enumerate} + \item $x_i^{(k)} = + \frac{b_i - \sum_{j=1}^{i-1}a_{ij}x_j^{(k)} + - \sum_{j=i+1}^{n}a_{ij}x_j^{(k-1)}}{a_{ii}}$ + \item If $\|\vec{x}^{(k)}-\vec{x}^{(k-1)} < \epsilon\|$, + where $\epsilon$ is a specified stopping criteria, stop. + \end{enumerate} + \end{enumerate} +\end{enumerate} +\end{algorithm} + +If you'd rather have the same numbering throughout the algorithm +but still want the convenient indentation of nested +\texttt{enumerate} environments, you can use the +\texttt{enumerate*} environment provided by the \textsf{jmlr} +class. For example, see \algorithmref{alg:moore}. + +\begin{algorithm} +\caption{Moore's Shortest Path}\label{alg:moore} +Given a connected graph $G$, where the length of each edge is 1: +\begin{enumerate*} + \item Set the label of vertex $s$ to 0 + \item Set $i=0$ + \begin{enumerate*} + \item \label{step:locate}Locate all unlabelled vertices + adjacent to a vertex labelled $i$ and label them $i+1$ + \item If vertex $t$ has been labelled, + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] the shortest path can be found by backtracking, and + the length is given by the label of $t$. + \end{enumerate*} + otherwise + \begin{enumerate*} + \item[] increment $i$ and return to step~\ref{step:locate} + \end{enumerate*} + \end{enumerate*} +\end{enumerate*} +\end{algorithm} + +Pseudo code can be displayed using the \texttt{algorithm2e} +environment. This is defined by the \textsf{algorithm2e} package +(which is automatically loaded) so check the \textsf{algorithm2e} +documentation for further details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc +algorithm2e} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/algorithm2e}} +For an example, see \algorithmref{alg:net}. + +\begin{algorithm2e} +\caption{Computing Net Activation} +\label{alg:net} +\dontprintsemicolon +\linesnumbered +\KwIn{$x_1, \ldots, x_n, w_1, \ldots, w_n$} +\KwOut{$y$, the net activation} +$y\leftarrow 0$\; +\For{$i\leftarrow 1$ \KwTo $n$}{ + $y \leftarrow y + w_i*x_i$\; +} +\end{algorithm2e} + +\section{Description Lists} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class also provides a description-like +environment called \texttt{altdescription}. This has an +argument that should be the widest label in the list. Compare: +\begin{description} +\item[add] A method that adds two variables. +\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. +\end{description} +with +\begin{altdescription}{differentiate} +\item[add] A method that adds two variables. +\item[differentiate] A method that differentiates a function. +\end{altdescription} + +\section{Theorems, Lemmas etc} +\label{sec:theorems} + +The following theorem-like environments are predefined by +the \textsf{jmlr} class: \texttt{theorem}, \texttt{example}, +\texttt{lemma}, \texttt{proposition}, \texttt{remark}, +\texttt{corollary}, \texttt{definition}, \texttt{conjecture} +and \texttt{axiom}. You can use the \texttt{proof} environment +to display the proof if need be, as in \theoremref{thm:eigenpow}. + +\begin{theorem}[Eigenvalue Powers]\label{thm:eigenpow} +If $\lambda$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector +$\vec{\xi}$, then $\lambda^n$ is an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}^n$ +with eigenvector $\vec{\xi}$. +\begin{proof} +Let $\lambda$ be an eigenvalue of $\vec{B}$ with eigenvector +$\xi$, then +\begin{align*} +\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{\xi} +\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:} +\vec{B}\vec{B}\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +\Rightarrow \vec{B}^2\vec{\xi} &= \lambda\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad +\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^2\vec{\xi} +\end{align*} +Therefore true for $n=2$. Now assume true for $n=k$: +\begin{align*} +\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{\xi} +\intertext{premultiply by $\vec{B}$:} +\vec{B}\vec{B}^k\vec{\xi} &= \vec{B}\lambda^k\vec{\xi}\\ +\Rightarrow \vec{B}^{k+1}\vec{\xi} &= \lambda^k\vec{B}\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^k\lambda\vec{\xi}\qquad +\text{since }\vec{B}\vec{\xi}=\lambda\vec{\xi}\\ +&= \lambda^{k+1}\vec{\xi} +\end{align*} +Therefore true for $n=k+1$. Therefore, by induction, true for all +$n$. +\end{proof} +\end{theorem} + +\begin{lemma}[A Sample Lemma]\label{lem:sample} +This is a lemma. +\end{lemma} + +\begin{remark}[A Sample Remark]\label{rem:sample} +This is a remark. +\end{remark} + +\begin{corollary}[A Sample Corollary]\label{cor:sample} +This is a corollary. +\end{corollary} + +\begin{definition}[A Sample Definition]\label{def:sample} +This is a definition. +\end{definition} + +\begin{conjecture}[A Sample Conjecture]\label{con:sample} +This is a conjecture. +\end{conjecture} + +\begin{axiom}[A Sample Axiom]\label{ax:sample} +This is an axiom. +\end{axiom} + +\begin{example}[An Example]\label{ex:sample} +This is an example. +\end{example} + +\section{Color vs Grayscale} +\label{sec:color} + +It's helpful if authors supply grayscale versions of their +images in the event that the article is to be incorporated into +a black and white printed book. With external PDF, PNG or JPG +graphic files, you just need to supply a grayscale version of the +file. For example, if the file is called \texttt{myimage.png}, +then the gray version should be \texttt{myimage-gray.png} or +\texttt{myimage-gray.pdf} or \texttt{myimage-gray.jpg}. You don't +need to modify your code. The \textsf{jmlr} class checks for +the existence of the grayscale version if it is print mode +(provided you have used \verb|\includegraphics| and haven't +specified the file extension). + +You can use \verb|\ifprint| to determine which mode you are in. +For example, in \figureref{fig:nodes}, the +\ifprint{dark gray}{purple} ellipse represents an input and the +\ifprint{light gray}{yellow} ellipse represents an output. +Another example: {\ifprint{\bfseries}{\color{red}}important text!} + +You can use the class option \texttt{gray} to see how the +document will appear in gray scale mode. \textcolor{blue}{Colored +text} will automatically be converted to gray scale. + +The \textsf{jmlr} class loads the \textsf{xcolor} +package, so you can also define your own colors. For example: +\ifprint + {\definecolor{myred}{gray}{0.5}}% + {\definecolor{myred}{rgb}{0.5,0,0}}% +\textcolor{myred}{XYZ}. + +The \textsf{xcolor} class is loaded with the \texttt{x11names} +option, so you can use any of the x11 predefined colors (listed +in the \textsf{xcolor} documentation\footnote{either +\texttt{texdoc xcolor} or \url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/xcolor}}). + +\section{Citations and Bibliography} +\label{sec:cite} + +The \textsf{jmlr} class automatically loads \textsf{natbib}. +This sample file has the citations defined in the accompanying +BibTeX file \texttt{jmlr-sample.bib}. For a parenthetical +citation use \verb|\citep|. For example +\citep{guyon-elisseeff-03}. For a textual citation use +\verb|\citet|. For example \citet{guyon2007causalreport}. +Both commands may take a comma-separated list, for example +\citet{guyon-elisseeff-03,guyon2007causalreport}. + +These commands have optional arguments and have a starred +version. See the \textsf{natbib} documentation for further +details.\footnote{Either \texttt{texdoc natbib} or +\url{http://www.ctan.org/pkg/natbib}} + +The bibliography is displayed using \verb|\bibliography|. + +\acks{Acknowledgements go here.} + +\bibliography{jmlr-sample} + +\appendix + +\section{First Appendix}\label{apd:first} + +This is the first appendix. + +\section{Second Appendix}\label{apd:second} + +This is the second appendix. + +\end{document} |
